You are on page 1of 134

User's Model DY

Manual Vortex Flowmeter


(Integral Type, Remote Type)
Model DYA
Vortex Flow Converter
(Remote Type)
IM 01R06A00-01E-E

IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd Edition, Jan. 2007
CONTENTS

CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. v
1. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS ................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Model and Specifications .................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Precautions Regarding Transportation and Storage Location ........................ 1-1
1.3 Precautions Regarding Installation Locations .................................................. 1-1
2. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Precautions Regarding Installation Locations .................................................. 2-1
2.2 Piping .................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Precautions Regarding Installation .................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Piping to Improve Durability ............................................................................... 2-5
2.5 Cryogenic and High process Temperature Version Insulation ........................ 2-5
2.6 Installing the Vortex Flow-meter ......................................................................... 2-6
3. WIRING .................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Wiring Precautions .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Wiring for Output Condition ................................................................................ 3-1
3.3 Connection ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.4 Wiring Cables and Wires ..................................................................................... 3-4
3.5 Connection of the Remote Type Signal Cable................................................... 3-4
3.6 Method of Finishing the Signal Cable End(DYC) .............................................. 3-5
3.6.1 For Vortex Flowmeter (DY-N) .................................................................................. 3-5
3.6.2 For Vortex Flow Converter (DYA)............................................................................ 3-6
3.7 Wiring Cautions.................................................................................................... 3-7
3.8 Grounding ............................................................................................................. 3-7
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES ..................................................... 4-1
4.1 Construction of the Display ................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Display Contents in Display Section .................................................................. 4-2
4.3 Display Contents in Display Section .................................................................. 4-3
4.3.1 Change the Display Mode from % Display to Engineering Unit............................ 4-4
4.3.2 Indicate the Total Rate in the Lower Display .......................................................... 4-5
4.4 Setting Mode......................................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.1 Structure of Setting Mode Display ........................................................................... 4-6
4.4.2 Method of Parameter Setting .................................................................................... 4-7
4.5 Operation for the BT200 ...................................................................................... 4-9
4.5.1 Connection Method for the BT200 ........................................................................... 4-9
4.5.2 Displaying Flow Rate Data ...................................................................................... 4-10
4.5.3 Setting Parameters .................................................................................................. 4-11
4.6 Operation for HART Communicator ................................................................. 4-13
4.6.1 Interconnection between digitalYEWFLO and HART Communicator ................ 4-13
4.6.2 Keys and Functions of Model 275 .......................................................................... 4-14
4.6.3 Display ...................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.6.4 Calling Up Menu Addresses ................................................................................... 4-16
4.6.5 Entering, Setting and Sending Data ...................................................................... 4-17
4.6.6 Parameters Configuration....................................................................................... 4-17
4.6.7 Unique Functions of HART Communicator .......................................................... 4-18
4.6.8 Data Renewing ......................................................................................................... 4-18
4.6.9 Checking for Problems ........................................................................................... 4-18
4.6.10 Write Protect .......................................................................................................... 4-19
4.6.11 Menu Tree .............................................................................................................. 4-20

All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2001. Yokogawa Electric Corporation i IM 01R06A00-01E-E


3rd edition, Jan. 2007
CONTENTS

5. Parameter Setup ..................................................................................... 5-1


5.1 Parameter Setup .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Multi-Variable Type Parameter (Only for /MV) ................................................... 5-1
5.3 Parameters List .................................................................................................... 5-1
5.4 Parameter Description ......................................................................................... 5-9
5.5 Error Code Lists ................................................................................................. 5-17
6. OPERATION ............................................................................................6-1
6.1 Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Zero Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.2 Span Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.3 Loop test ..................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.4 Totalizer Function Start and Totalized Value Reset ............................................... 6-1
6.1.5 Unit of Pulse Output (Scaling) .................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.6 Power Failure ............................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2 Adjustment for Manual Mode .............................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1 Low Cut Adjustment .................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.2 Tuning ......................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Other Maintenance ............................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.1 Cleaning Precautions ................................................................................................ 6-3
7. MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Changing the Terminal Box Orientation ............................................................ 7-2
7.2 Indicator Removal and Rotation ......................................................................... 7-3
7.3 Amplifier Unit Removal........................................................................................ 7-3
7.4 Amplifier Unit Assembling .................................................................................. 7-3
7.5 Vortex Shedder Removal .................................................................................... 7-4
7.6 Setting Switches .................................................................................................. 7-6
7.6.1 Setting of Burnout Switch......................................................................................... 7-6
7.6.2 Setting of Write Protect Switch ................................................................................ 7-6
7.7 Software Configuration ....................................................................................... 7-7
8. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................. 8-1
8.1 Flow ....................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Flow (Only for /MV) .............................................................................................. 8-4
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................9-1
9.1 Outline ................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Standard Specifications ...................................................................................... 9-2
9.3 Model and Suffix Codes ...................................................................................... 9-5
9.4 Option Specifications .......................................................................................... 9-7
9.4.1 Option Specifications ................................................................................................ 9-7
9.4.2 OPTION SPECIFICATIONS (For Explosion Protected Type) ................................. 9-9
9.4.3 OPTION MULTI-VARIABLE (BUILD IN TEMPERATURE SENSOR) TYPE (/MV) .. 9-11
9.4.4 OPTION REDUCED BORE TYPE (/R1, /R2) ............................................................ 9-12
9.5 Sizing .................................................................................................................. 9-14
9.6 REMARKS ON INSTALLATION ......................................................................... 9-19
9.7 External Dimensions ......................................................................................... 9-22

IM 01R06A00-01E-E ii
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
CONTENTS

10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT .............................. 10-1


10.1 ATEX ................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.1 Technical Data ....................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 Installation .............................................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.3 Operation ................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.4 Maintenance and Repair ....................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.5 Installation Diagram of Intrinsically safe (and Note) .......................................... 10-3
10.1.6 Installation Diagram of Type of Protection “n” .................................................. 10-3
10.1.7 Data Plate ............................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.8 Screw Marking ....................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2 FM ...................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.1 Technical Data ....................................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.2 Wiring ...................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.3 Operation ................................................................................................................ 10-5
10.2.4 Maintenance and Repair ....................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.5 Installation Diagram .............................................................................................. 10-6
10.2.6 Data Plate ............................................................................................................... 10-7
11. PRESSURE EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE ............................................... 11-1

iii IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
CONTENTS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E iv
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

The DY series of vortex flowmeters have been fine-tuned to Safety and Modification Precautions
your order specifications prior to shipment. Before use, read • The following general safety precautions must be
this manual thoroughly and familiarize yourself fully with observed during all phases of operation, service, and
the features, operations and handling of digitalYEWFLO to repair of this instrument. Failure to comply with these
have the instrument deliver its full capabilities and to ensure precautions or with specific WARNINGS given elsewhere
its efficient and correct use. in this manual violates safety standards of design,
manufacture, and intended use of the instrument.
Notices Regarding This Manual Yokogawa assumes no liability for the customer's failure
• This manual should be passed to the end user. to comply with these requirements. If this instrument is
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without used in a manner not specified in this manual, the
prior notice. protection provided by this instrument may be impaired.
• All rights reserved. No part of this document may be • The following safety symbol marks are used in this user's
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means manual and instrument.
without the written permission of Yokogawa Electric
Corporation (hereinafter simply referred to as Yokogawa).
• This manual neither does warrant the marketability of this WARNING
instrument nor it does warrant that the instrument will suit
A WARNING sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention
a particular purpose of the user.
to procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if
• Every effort has been made to ensure accuracy in the
not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in
contents of this manual. However, should any questions
injury or death of personnel.
arise or errors come to your attention, please contact your
nearest Yokogawa sales office that appears on the back of
this manual or the sales representative from which you
purchased the product. CAUTION
• This manual is not intended for models with custom
specifications. A CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention
• Revisions may not always be made in this manual in to procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if
conjunction with changes in specifications, constructions not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in
and/or components if such changes are not deemed to damage to or destruction of part or all of the product.
interfere with the instrument’s functionality or perfor-
mance.
Notices Regarding Safety and Modification IMPORTANT
• For the protection and safety of personnel, the instrument
and the system comprising the instrument, be sure to An IMPORTANT sign denotes that attention is
follow the instructions on safety described in this manual required to avoid damage to the instrument or system
when handling the product. If you handle the instrument failure.
in a manner contrary to these instructions, Yokogawa
does not guarantee safety.
• If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this
NOTE
manual, the protection provided by this instrument may
be impaired. A NOTE sign denotes information necessary for
• As for explosionproof model, if you yourself repair or essential understanding of operation and fea-
modify the instrument and then fail to return it to its tures.
original form, the explosion-protected construction of the
instrument will be impaired, creating a hazardous
condition. Be sure to consult Yokogawa for repairs and Functional grounding terminal
modifications. Direct current

v IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
INTRODUCTION

Warranty
• The warranty of this instrument shall cover the period
noted on the quotation presented to the Purchaser at the
time of purchase. The Seller shall repair the instrument
free of charge when the failure occurred during the
warranty period.
• All inquiries on instrument failure should be directed to
the Seller’s sales representative from whom you purchased
the instrument or your nearest sales office of the Seller.
• Should the instrument fail, contact the Seller specifying
the model and instrument number of the product in
question. Be specific in describing details on the failure
and the process in which the failure occurred. It will be
helpful if schematic diagrams and/or records of data are
attached to the failed instrument.
• Whether or not the failed instrument should be repaired
free of charge shall be left solely to the discretion of the
Seller as a result of an inspection by the Seller.
The Purchaser shall not be entitled to receive
repair services from the Seller free of charge,
even during the warranty period, if the
malfunction or damage is due to:
• improper and/or inadequate maintenance of the instrument
in question by the Purchaser.
• handling, use or storage of the instrument in question
beyond the design and/or specifications requirements.
• use of the instrument in question in a location not
conforming to the conditions specified in the Seller's
General Specification or Instruction Manual.
• retrofitting and/or repair by an other party than the Seller
or a party to whom the Seller has entrusted repair
services.
• improper relocation of the instrument in question after
delivery.
• reason of force measure such as fires, earthquakes, storms/
floods, thunder/lightning, or other reasons not attributable
to the instrument in question.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E vi
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
INTRODUCTION

Using the Vortex Flowmeter Safely • Care should be taken to prevent the build up of
dirt, dust or other substances on the display
WARNING panel glass or data plate. If these surfaces do
get dirty, wipe them clean with a soft dry cloth.
(1) Installation (5) Explosion Protected Type Instrument
• Installation of the vortex flowmeter must be • For explosion proof type instrument, the de-
performed by expert engineer or skilled person- scription in Chapter 10 “EXPLOSION PRO-
nel. No operator shall be permitted to perform TECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT” is prior to the
procedures relating to installation. other description in this user's manual.
• The vortex flowmeter is a heavy instrument. • Only trained persons use this instrument in the
Be careful that no damage is caused to person- industrial location.
nel through accidentally dropping it, or by
• The functional grounding must be connected
exerting excessive force on the vortex flowme- to a suitable IS grounding system.
ter. When moving the vortex flowmeter, always • Take care not to generate mechanical spark
use a trolley and have at least two people carry
when access to the instrument and peripheral
it. devices in hazardous locations.
• When the vortex flowmeter is processing hot (6) European Pressure Equipment Directive
fluids, the instrument itself may become ex-
(PED)
tremely hot. Take sufficient care not to get • When using the instrument as a PED-compliant
burnt. product, be sure to read Chapter 11 before
• Where the fluid being processed is a toxic
use.
substance, avoid contact with the fluid and
avoid inhaling any residual gas, even after the
instrument has been taken off the line for
maintenance and so forth.
• All procedures relating to installation must
comply with the electrical code of the country
where it is used.
(2) Wiring
• The wiring of the vortex flowmeter must be
performed by expert engineer or skilled person-
nel. No operator shall be permitted to perform
procedures relating to wiring.
• When connecting the wiring, check that the
supply voltage is within the range of the voltage
specified for this instrument before connecting
the power cable. In addition, check that no
voltage is applied to the power cable before
connecting the wiring.
• The functional grounding must be connected
securely at the terminal with the mark to
avoid danger to personnel.
(3) Operation
• Only expert engineer or skilled personnel are
permitted to open the cover.
(4) Maintenance
• Maintenance on the vortex flowmeter should be
performed by expert engineer or skilled person-
nel. No operator shall be permitted to perform
any operations relating to maintenance.
• Always conform to maintenance procedures
outlined in this manual. If necessary, contact
Yokogawa.

vii IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
INTRODUCTION

ATEX Documentation
This procedure is only applicable to the countries in
SF
European Union.
Kaikkien ATEX Ex -tyyppisten tuotteiden käyttöhjeet ovat
saatavilla englannin-, saksan- ja ranskankielisinä. Mikäli
GB tarvitsette Ex -tyyppisten tuotteiden ohjeita omalla
paikallisella kielellännne, ottakaa yhteyttä lähimpään
All instruction manuals for ATEX Ex related products are Yokogawa-toimistoon tai -edustajaan.
available in English, German and French. Should you require
Ex related instructions in your local language, you are to
contact your nearest Yokogawa office or representative.
P

Todos os manuais de instruções referentes aos produtos Ex


DK da ATEX estão disponíveis em Inglês, Alemão e Francês. Se
necessitar de instruções na sua língua relacionadas com
Alle brugervejledninger for produkter relateret til ATEX Ex produtos Ex, deverá entrar em contacto com a delegação
er tilgængelige på engelsk, tysk og fransk. Skulle De ønske mais próxima ou com um representante da Yokogawa.
yderligere oplysninger om håndtering af Ex produkter på eget
sprog, kan De rette henvendelse herom til den nærmeste
Yokogawa afdeling eller forhandler.
F

Tous les manuels d’instruction des produits ATEX Ex sont


I disponibles en langue anglaise, allemande et française. Si
vous nécessitez des instructions relatives aux produits Ex
Tutti i manuali operativi di prodotti ATEX contrassegnati con dans votre langue, veuillez bien contacter votre représentant
Ex sono disponibili in inglese, tedesco e francese. Se si Yokogawa le plus proche.
desidera ricevere i manuali operativi di prodotti Ex in lingua
locale, mettersi in contatto con l’ufficio Yokogawa più vicino
o con un rappresentante.
D

Alle Betriebsanleitungen für ATEX Ex bezogene Produkte


E stehen in den Sprachen Englisch, Deutsch und Französisch
zur Verfügung. Sollten Sie die Betriebsanleitungen für Ex-
Todos los manuales de instrucciones para los productos Produkte in Ihrer Landessprache benötigen, setzen Sie sich
antiexplosivos de ATEX están disponibles en inglés, alemán bitte mit Ihrem örtlichen Yokogawa-Vertreter in Verbindung.
y francés. Si desea solicitar las instrucciones de estos
artículos antiexplosivos en su idioma local, deberá ponerse en
contacto con la oficina o el representante de Yokogawa más
S
cercano.
Alla instruktionsböcker för ATEX Ex (explosionssäkra)
produkter är tillgängliga på engelska, tyska och franska. Om
NL Ni behöver instruktioner för dessa explosionssäkra produkter
på annat språk, skall Ni kontakta närmaste Yokogawakontor
Alle handleidingen voor producten die te maken hebben met eller representant.
ATEX explosiebeveiliging (Ex) zijn verkrijgbaar in het
Engels, Duits en Frans. Neem, indien u aanwijzingen op het
gebied van explosiebeveiliging nodig hebt in uw eigen taal,
GR
contact op met de dichtstbijzijnde vestiging van Yokogawa of
met een vertegenwoordiger.
Ολα τα εγχειριδια λειτουργιαζ τωυ προιουτϖυ µε
ΑΤΕX Εx διατιΘευται στα Αγγλικα, Γερµαυικα
και Γαλλικα. Σε περιπτωση που χρειαζεοτε
οδηγιεζ σχετικα µε Ex στηυ τοπικη γλωσσα
παρακαλουµε επικοιυωυηστε µε το πλησιεστερο
γραϕειο τηζ Yokogawa η αντιπροσωπο τηζ.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E viii
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
INTRODUCTION

SK PL

CZ

SLO

LT H

BG
LV

EST RO

ix IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
INTRODUCTION

IM 01R06A00-01E-E x
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
1. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

1. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

The Model DY Vortex Flowmeter and Model DYA Vortex 1.2 Precautions Regarding
Flow Converter are thoroughly tested at the factory before Transportation and Storage
shipment. When these instruments are delivered, perform a
visual check to ascertain that no damage occurred during
Location
shipment. To protect against accidental damage to digitalYEWFLO
while transporting it to a new location, pack it in the original
This section describes important cautions in handling these
packing as when shipped from the Yokogawa factory.
instruments. Read carefully before using them.

If you have any problems or questions, contact your nearest


YOKOGAWA service center or sales representative.
WARNING

The Vortex Flowmeter is a heavy instrument. Please


1.1 Model and Specifications be careful to prevent persons from injuring when it is
The model and important specifications are indicated on the handled.
data plate attached to the case. Verify that they are the same
as those specified in the original order, referring to paragraph
Deterioration in insulation or corrosion can occur for
9.2 to 9.5. In any correspondence, always give model
unexpected reasons if digitalYEWFLO is left uninstalled for
(MODEL), serial number (NO) and calibrated range
a prolonged period after delivery. If digitalYEWFLO is likely
(RANGE) from the data plate.
to be stored over a prolonged period, observe the following
precautions.

3UA
n Store the vortex flowmeter with forwarded statement.
n Choose a storage location that satisfies the following
requirements:
• Not exposed to rain or splashwater.
• Less susceptible to mechanical vibration or shock.
• Kept within the temperature and humidity ranges shown
in the following table, preferably at normal temperature
and humidity (approximately 25°C, 65%)
Temperature –40°C to +80°C
Humidity 5 to 100% (no condensation)
T010201.EPS

1.3 Precautions Regarding In-


stallation Locations
4 ~ 20mA DC / PULSE TAG NO.
MPa at 38°C
*1)

10.5 ~ 42V DC 3UA (1) Ambient Temperature


*2)
Avoid an area which has wide temperature variations.
*1): K factor at 15°C
*2): The product - producing country. F010101.EPS
When the installation area is subjected to heat radiation
from process plant, ensure adequate heat prevention or
Figure 1.1(a) Example of Data Plate for Integral Type
ventilation.
TAG NO. (2) Atmospheric Conditions
MPa at 38°C

Avoid installing the vortex flowmeter in a corrosive


3WA
atmosphere. When the vortex flowmeter must be
installed in a corrosive atmosphere, adequate ventilation
4 ~ 20mA DC / PULSE TAG NO. must be provided.

10.5 ~ 42V DC 3YA

F010102.EPS

Figure 1.1(b) Example of Data Plate for Remote Type

1-1 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
1. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

(3) Mechanical Shock or Vibration


The vortex flowmeter is of sturdy construction, but
select an area subject to minimize mechanical vibrations
or impact shock. If the flowmeter is subject to vibra-
tions, it is recommended that pipeline supports to be
provided as shown in Figure 1.2.
(4) Other Considerations
• Choose a location where is sufficient clearance around
digitalYEWFLO exist to allow such work as routine
inspections.
• Choose a location that ensures easy wiring and piping.

digitalYEWFLO
Vortex Flowmeter

Pipeline

Pipeline Support

F010301.EPS

Figure 1.2

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 1-2
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2. INSTALLATION
(4) Precautions Regarding Piping
WARNING (a) Ensure that the process connector bolts are tightened
firmly.
This instrument must be installed by expert engineer
(b) Ensure that no leak exists in the process connection
or skilled personnel. The procedures described in this
pipeline.
chapter are not permitted for operators.
(c) Do not apply a pressure higher than the specified
maximum working pressure.
(d) Do not loosen or tighten the flange mounting bolts when
2.1 Precautions Regarding In- the assembly is pressurized.
stallation Locations (e) Handle the vortex flowmeter carefully when measuring
dangerous liquids, so that the liquids do not splash into
(1) Ambient Temperature eyes or on face. When using dangerous gases, be careful
Avoid an area which has wide temperature variations. not to inhale them.
When the installation area is subjected to heat radiation
from process plant, ensure adequate heat prevention or 2.2 Piping
ventilation.
See Table 2.1 about Valve Position and Straight Pipe Length
(2) Atmospheric Conditions and so on.
Avoid installing the vortex flowmeter in a corrosive
atmosphere. When the vortex flowmeter must be
installed in a corrosive atmosphere, adequate ventilation
must be provided
(3) Mechanical Shock or Vibration
The vortex flowmeter is of sturdy construction, but
select an area subject to minimize mechanical vibration
or impact shock. If the flowmeter is subject to vibra-
tions, it is recommended that pipeline supports to be
provided as shown in Figure 2.1.

digitalYEWFLO
Vortex Flowmeter

Pipeline

Pipeline Support

F020101.EPS

Figure 2.1

2-1 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Piping support Adjacent pipes


Typical vibration immunity level is 1G for normal piping The process pipline inner diameter should be larger than
condition.Piping support should be fixed in case of over 1G the digitalYEWFLO inner diameter.
vibration level. Use the following adjacent pipe:
Sch 40 or less:
Installation direction Model Code DY015 up to DY050
If a pipe is always filled with liquids, the pipe can be DY025-/R1 up to DY080-/R1
DY040-/R2 up to DY100-/R2
installed vertically or at inclined angle.
Sch 80 or less:
Model Code DY080 up to DY300
DY100-/R1 up to DY200-/R1
DY150-/R2 up to DY200-/R2

Straight pipe length


*D: piping diameter
*K-factor may be influenced about 0.5% in case that straight
pipe length of upstream is less than values below.

Table 2.1 Installation


Description Figure
digitalYEWFLO
Reducer pipe: Flow
Ensure the upstream straight pipe length to be 5D or more, and the
downstream straight pipe length to be 5D or more for per reducer
pipe.
5D or more
Reducer
5D or more

Expander pipe: digitalYEWFLO


Ensure the upstream straight pipe length to be 10D or more, and Flow

the downstream straight pipe length to be 5D or more for per


expander pipe.
10D or more
Expander
5D or more

Bent pipe and straight pipe length: 1. digitalYEWFLO


1. Single bent pipe Flow

10D or more 5D or more

digitalYEWFLO
Flow
2. Double bent pipe; coplanar 2.

10D or more 5D or more

digitalYEWFLO
Flow
3. Double bent pipe; non coplanar 3.

20D or more 5D or more

digitalYEWFLO
Valve position and straight pipe length:
■ Install the valve on the downstream side of the flowmeter.
The upstream straight pipe length dependent on the element
Refer to each element above for
located on the upstream such as reducer/expander, bent and straight pipe run.
etc., refer to description as above. Keep 5D or more for
downstream straight pipe length.
Flow Valve digitalYEWFLO
■ In case the valve has to be installed on the upstream of the
flowmeter, ensure the upstream straight pipe length to be 20D
or more, and the downstream straight pipe length be 5D or more.
20D or more 5D or more

Fluid vibration:
For a gas line which uses a position-type or roots-type blower
compressor or a high-pressure liquid line (about 1MPa or more)
which uses piston-type or plunger-type pump, fluid vibrations may
be produced.
In these case, install valve on the upstream side of digitalYEWFLO.
For inevitable fluid vibration, put a vibration damping device such as
throttling plate or expansion section in the upstream side of
digitalYEWFLO.

Piston-type or plunger pump:


Install the accumulator on the upstream side of digitalYEWFLO to digitalYEWFLO
reduce fluid vibrations.

F01.01.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 2-2
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Description Figure
Valve positon (T-type piping exist):
When pulsation causes by a T-type piping exist, install the valve
on the upstream of the flowmeter. Relocating
Example:As shown in the figure, when the valve V1 is turned digitalYEWFLO
Flow Valve (Off)
off, the fluid flow throught B as to meter A the flow is zero. But
due to the pulsating pressure is detected, the meter is zero
point become fluctuating. To avoid this, change the valve V1 B
location to V1'. V1’ V1
• In case of the Reduced Bore type, moisture may be remained
upstream of the flowmeter. Drain it appropriately. A

Pressure and Temperature Taps: Pressure tap


Pressure tap outlet: install this tap between 2D and 7D on the
digitalYEWFLO Temperature tap
downstream side of a flowmeter.
Temperature tap outlet: install this on the downstream side 1D Upstream
to 2D away from a pressure tap.

Flow
downstream
2 to 7D 1 to 2D

Mounting Gasket: digitalYEWFLO


Avoid mounting gaskets which protrude into the pipe line. This
may cause inaccurate readings.
Use the gaskets with bolt holes, even if digitalYEWFLO is the
wafer type.
When using a spiral gasket(without bolt holes), confirm the size
with the gasket -manufacturer, as standard items may not be Pipeline Flange
used for certain flange ratings. Pipeline

No good

digitalYEWFLO
Heat-Insulation:
When an integral-type flowmeter or a remote type detector is Bracket
installed and the pipe carrying higt-temperature fluids is
Heat-Insulator
heat-insulated, do not wrap adiabatic materials around the
installation bracket of the converter.
• Refer to “2.5 Cryogenic and High Process Temperature
Version Insulation” and install it rightly.

Flushing of the pipe line:


Flush and clean scale, incrustation and sludge on the inside of digitalYEWFLO
pipe for newly installed pipe line and repaired pipe line before
the operation. For flushing, the flow should flow through
bypass-piping to avoid damaging the flowmeter. If there is no
bypass-piping, install short pipe instead of the flowmeter.

Short pipe

F020102-2.EPS

2-3 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2.3 Precautions Regarding In- • Piping for Avoiding Bubbles


stallation Flows containing both gas and liquid cause problems.
Avoid gas bubbles in a liquid flow. Piping should be
carried out to avoid bubble generation.
WARNING Install the valve on the downstream side of the flowme-
ter because pressure drop across the control valve may
In case of high process temperature, care should be cause gas to come out of the solution.
taken not to burn yourself because the surface of
(Good) (No Good)
body and case reach a high temperature. Control
Value

(1) Gas or Steam Measuring Precautions


• Piping to Prevent Standing Liquid Flow
Mount digitalYEWFLO in a vertical pipeline to avoid
liquid traps. When digitalYEWFLO is installed horizon- (Good)
tally, raise that part of the pipeline in which the
digitalYEWFLO is installed.

(Good)
Flow

(Good) Flow

Flow
Flow

(No Good)
F020303.EPS

Figure 2.4
Flow
F020301.EPS (3) Multi-Phase Flow
Figure 2.2 digitalYEWFLO can measure gas, liquid and steam
when there is no change in state. However, accurate
measurement of mixed flows (e.g. gas and liquid) is not
(2) Liquid Measurement Precautions
possible.
To insure accurate measurement, the digitalYEWFLO (No Good)
must always have a full pipe.

• Piping Requirements for Proper Operation


Allow the flow to flow against gravity. When the flow is
moving with gravity, lift the down-stream pipe length
above the digitalYEWFLO installation level to maintain
Mist flow
full pipeline.
(No Good)

Flow
(No Good) (No Good)
Liquid
Flow
Flow
Stratified flow
(Good)
(No Good)
h h>0
(Good)
h
Flow h>0 Gas Flow
Flow

F020302.EPS
Bubble flow F020304.EPS

Figure 2.3 Figure 2.5

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 2-4
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

(4) Pipeline Diameter and digitalYEWFLO (1) Installing Cryogenic Vortex Flowmeter
The process pipeline inner diameter should be slightly For cryogenic applications, use stainless steel mounting
larger than the vortex flowmeter inner diameter, bolts and nuts to install the flowmeter. These can be
schedule 40 or lower pipe should be used for 1/2 to 2 ordered separately from YOKOGAWA. Cover the
inch flowmeters and schedule 80 or lower pipes for 3 to flowmeter body with heat insulating material so that the
8 inch flowmeters. flowmeter can be maintained at ultra-low temperatures
(No Good) (Good) (refer to the Figure 2.8).

(2) Maintenance for Cryogenic Applications


DY/LT uses special materials that produce vortex
D1 D2 D1 D2 flowmeter for cryogenic applications. When you are
replacing a shedder bar, specify cryogenic type shedder
bar. To avoid condensing in the terminal box, ensure that
D1 < D2 D1 D2
F020305.EPS
the wire connecting port is well sealed.
Figure 2.6

(5) Waterproof Construction Bracket


The vortex flowmeter is of IP67, NEMA4X tight Cold insulating material
protection. However, it cannot be used under water.

2.4 Piping to Improve Durability


(1) Pipe cleaning
F020501.EPS
• Flushing of pipe line (Cleaning) Figure 2.8
Flush and clean scale, incrustation and sludge on the
inside of pipe wall for newly installed pipe line and (3) Installing High Process Temperature
repaired pipe line before the operation. Vortex Flowmeter
• Fluid Carrying Solids Installation of the flowmeter is the same as the standard
Do not measure fluids that carry solids (e.g. sand and type. Cover the flowmeter body with heat insulating
pebbles). Make sure users periodically remove solids material following instruction of “CAUTION”.
adhering to the vortex shedder.
• Obstruction of flow fluids may cause to make a chemical CAUTION
reaction and the fluid will be crystallized and hardened,
and be deposited on the pipe wall and shedder bar. Keep the upper limit of heat insulating material to
In those cases, clean shedder bar. prevent overheating of the terminal box.
Seal the heat insulating material to avoid hot-air
(2) Bypass piping leakage.
Installing a bypass, as illustrated in the figure below,
permits the digitalYEWFLO to be checked or cleaned
conveniently (vortex shedder, etc.). 50mm min. 50mm min.

UPPER LIMIT OF UPPER LIMIT OF


HEAT INSULATING HEAT INSULATING
Bypass shut-off valve MATERIAL MATERIAL

digitalYEWFLO

Flow
Upstream shut-off valve Downstream shut-off valve Nominal Size: 100mm or under
F020401.EPS
Figure 2.7 Nominal Size: 150mm or over
F020501a.EPS

2.5 Cryogenic and High process


Temperature Version Insula- (4) Maintenance for High Process Tempera-
tion ture Applications
When you are using cryogenic type and high process DY/HT uses special materials that produce vortex
temperature version of digitalYEWFLO Vortex Flowmeter flowmeter for High Process Temperature applications
(Option code/HT /LT), refer to illustrated insulation method When you are replacing a shedder bar or a gasket,
as shown in Figure 2.8 specify High Process Temperature type.

2-5 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2.6 Installing the Vortex Flow- Table 2.2

meter Size
mm Flange Rating
Major Diameter of
External Threed of
Length
R(mm)
(inch) Stud Bolt d (mm)
15mm JIS 10K, 20K/DIN 10,
(1/2B) 16,25,40 12 160
WARNING
JIS 40K 16 160
ANSI 150, 300, 600 12.7 155
The Vortex Flowmeter is a heavy instrument. Please
25mm JIS 10K, 20K, 40K 16 160
be careful to prevent persons from injuring whin it is (1B) ANSI 150 12.7 155
handled. ANSI 300, 600 15.9 160
DIN 10, 16, 25, 40 12 160
40mm JIS 10K, 20K/DIN 10,
Before installing the instrument verify the following. The (1-1/2B) 16, 25, 40 16 160
direction of flow should match to the arrow mark on the JIS 40K 20 170
ANSI 150 12.7 155
instrument body. When changing the orientation of the 19.1 170
ANSI 300, 600
terminal box, refer to "7.1."
50mm JIS 10K, 20K, 40K/
(2B) DIN 10, 16, 25, 40 16
Installation of Vortex flowmeter of the wafer and flange type 200
ANSI 150, 300, 600 15.9
is shown in Table 2.3.
80mm JIS 10K/DIN 10, 16,
When installing the wafer type vortex flowmeter, it is (3B) 25, 40 16 220
JIS 20K, 40K 20
important to align the instrument bore with the inner diameter ANSI 150 15.9 240
of the adjacent piping. ANSI 300, 600 19.1

To establish alignment, use the four collars supplied with the 100mm JIS 10K/DIN 10, 16 16 220
(4B) JIS 20K/DIN 25, 40 20 240
instrument. JIS 40K 22 270
ANSI 150 15.9 240
1. Four collars are supplied for 1/2 inch (15mm) to 1- 1/ ANSI 300 19.1 240
2inch (40mm), 2 inch of JIS 10K or ANSI class 150 or ANSI 600 22.2 270
JPI class 150, and 3 inch of ANSI class 150 or JPI class T020601.EPS

150. Install the instrument as illustrated in Table 2.2.


LengthR
2. If the adjacent flanges have eight bolt holes, insert the
d
stud bolts in the holes on the instrument shoulder. Refer to
Figure 2.9.
Stainless steel stud bolts and nuts are available on order. Stud Bolt
Collar
When they are to be supplied by the user, refer to Table F020601.EPS
2.2 for stud bolt length. Gaskets must be supplied by the
user. Figure 2.9
3. Gasket:
Avoid mounting gaskets which protrude into the pipeline.
This may cause inaccurate readings.
Use gaskets with bolt holes, even if digitalYEWFLO is of
the wafer type. Refer to Figure 2.10.
When using a spiral gasket (without bolt holes), confirm
the size with the gasket-manufacturer, as standard items
may not be used for certain flange ratings.

Pipeline Flange
Pipeline

F020602.EPS

Figure 2.10

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 2-6
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Table 2.3(a) Installation of Wafer Type Vortex Flowmeter

Wafer type Description

Horizontal Installation Electrical Connection


When Installation Collar are required, the
installation vortex flowmeters applied to the
following line sizes and flange ratings. Flow Flange
Direction

Size mm(inch) Flange Rating Nut Flange


15 to 40 Stud Bolt (4 pcs.)
All ratings
(1/2 to 1-1/2) Gasket
JIS 10K, ANSI class 150,
50(2)
DIN PN10 to PN40
80(3) ANSI class 150, JPI class 150 Collar

Gasket
Nut
(1) Insert four collar on each of the four bolts and check
that all four collars contact the outside diameter of
the flowmeter body.
(2) Tighten the four bolts uniformly. Check for leakage
from the flange connections.

Vertical Installation
WARNING
The inside diameter of the gasket must (1) Insert two each collars on
Nut
be larger than the pipe inner diameter each of the lower two bolts.
so that it will not disturb the flow in the
pipeline. (2) Place the flowmeter body
Gasket on the lower two bolts.
(3) Tighten the four bolts
(including upper two bolts)
and nuts uniformly.
Gasket
Collar (4) Check for leakage from
WARNING Stud Bolt the flange connections.
When installing the Flowmeter vertically in the (4 pcs.)
open air, change the electrical connection port
direction to the ground. If the electrical Electrical Nut
connection port is installed upwards, rain connection
water might leak in.

Flow Direction

Horizontal Installation Vertical Installation


When Installation Collars are not required,the Flow Electrical Connection
installation vortex flowmeters applied to the Direction
following line sizes and flanges.

Size mm(inch) Flange Rating


Bolt Hole
Nut Flange
JIS 20K, 40K
50(2) ANSI class 300,600
Stud Bolt (8 pcs.)
JPI class 300,600
JIS 10K, 20K, 40K Flange
80(3) ANSI class 300, 600 Gasket
JPI class 300,600
JIS 10K, 20, 40K
100(4) ANSI class 150, 300, 600 Gasket
JPI class 150,300,600
Nut

Electrical
(1) Insert two stud bolts in the bolt holes Connection
on the flowmeter shoulder to align
the instrument body with the inner
diameter of the adjacent piping.
(2) Tighten all bolts uniformly and check
that there is no leakage between the
instrument and the flanges. Flow Direction
T020602.EPS

2-7 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Table 2.3(b) Installation of Flange Type Vortex Flowmeter

Flange type Description


Use the stud bolts and nuts supplied with the
flowmeter of the user. Horizontal Installation
The gaskets should be supplied by the user.

Flow Direction

Flange

Nut Flange
CAUTION Stud Bolt
The inside diameter of the gasket must be Gasket
larger than the pipe inner diameter so that it Nut
will not disturb the flow in the pipeline.
Gasket

Flow Direction

Vertical Installation
T020603.EPS

Table 2.3(c) Installation of remote Type Converter

Remote type converter Description

CAUTION The converter is mounted on a 2-inch (60.5mm outer dia.) stanchion or horizontal
pipe.
A signal cable (DYC) is used between the Do not mount the converter on a vertical pipe. It makes wiring and maintenance
remote type flowmeter and the converter. difficult.
The maximum signal cable length is 97.5ft The converter mounting orientation can be changed as illustrated below.
(30m).
Stanchion Mounting Horizontal Pipe Mounting

Nut

Bracket
2-inch Pipe
U-Bolt

T020604.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 2-8
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
3.WIRING

3. WIRING

3.2 Wiring for Output Condition


WARNING
Table 3.1 shows the connection method of several output
The wiring of the vortex flowmeter must be performed conditions.
by expert engineer or skilled personnel. No operator
shall be permitted to perform procedures relating to (1) Analog Output (4 to 20 mA DC)
wiring. This converter uses the same two wires for both, the
signal and power supply. A DC power supply is required
in a transmission loop. The total leadwire resistance
including the instrument load and power distributor
CAUTION
(supplied by the user) must conform to a value in the
Once all wiring is complete, check the connections permissible load resistance range. Refer to Figure 3.1
before applying power to the instrument. Improper shows.
arrangements or wiring may cause a unit malfunction 600
or damage. E–10.5 Communication

Load resistance R (Ω)


R=
0.0236 Applicable range
BRAIN and HART

3.1 Wiring Precautions


250
Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring:

CAUTION

• In cases where the ambient temperature 10.5 16.4 24.7 30 42


exceeds 50°C (122°F), use external heat-
Power Supply Voltage E (V)
resistant wiring with a maximum allowable F030201.EPS

temperature of 70°C (158°F) or above. Figure 3.1 Relationship between Power Supply Voltage
• Do not connect cables outdoors in wet weather and Load Resistance (4 to 20 mA DC Output)
in order to prevent damage from condensation
and to protect the insulation. (2) Pulse output and Alarm, Status Output
• Do not splice the cable between the flowtube
This version uses three wires between the converter and
terminal and the converter if it is too short. the power supply. A DC power and load resistance are
Replace the short cable with a cable that is the required, and pulse output is connected to a totalizer or
appropriate length. an electric counter. Low level of the pulse output is 0
• All the cable ends must be provided with round to 2V. No communication is possible over a transmis-
crimp-on terminals and be securely wired. sion line. Communication via the amplifier board is
• Be sure to turn power off before opening the always possible irrespective of the wiring condition.
cover.
• Before turning the power on, tighten the cover (3) Simultaneous Analog-Pulse Output
securely. When using digitalYEWFLO in the simultaneous analog
• Explosion protected types must be wired in -pulse output mode, the communicable distance of the
accordance with specific requirement (and, in transmission line is restricted on the wiring method.
certain countries, legal regulations) in order to Table 3.1 shows the examples of connection for this
preserve the effectiveness of their explosion output mode. Communication via the amplifier board is
protected features. always possible irrespective of the wiring condition.
• The terminal box cover is locked by the clamp.
In case of opening the terminal box cover, use
the hexagonal wrench attached.
• Be sure to lock the cover by the clamp using
the hexagonal wrench attached after installing
the cover.

3-1 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
3. WIRING

IMPORTANT

For pulse output and the simultaneous analog-pulse


output ,use the load resistance. Refer to Table 3.1.

3.3 Connection
Table 3.1 shows the connection sample of connection for
power supply and load resistance. The terminal position of
each connection is shown in Figure 3.2.

Integral type Remote type


Input Terminal from built-
T
in temperature sensor
Supply
A Input Terminals from 4 to 20 mA DC Output Power Supply
1
B vortex detector – and Output Signal Terminals
Pulse
C Common Terminal 1 Pulse Output Terminal
F030301.EPS

Figure 3.2

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 3-2
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
3.WIRING

Table 3.1 The connection example for simultaneous analog and pulse and alarm, status output.

Connection Description
Analog Output digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal
Distributor
In this case, + 24V DC
Communication is SUPPLY +
possible (up to a distance – 250Ω
of 2km when a CEV cable –
is used.) PULSE +

Pulse Output digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal Use the Three-wire shielded cable.
Shielded Cable
In this case,
No communication is SUPPLY + E
possible.

*1
PULSE + *2 R Electric counter

digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal Use the Three-wire shielded cable.


Status Output Shielded Cable
Alarm Output E
SUPPLY + Relay
In this case,
No communication is

possible. PULSE +
Mognetic
valve
External Power supply
30V DC, 120mA max
(Contact Rating)
AC power supply

When analog and pulse output are used, the length of communication line is subjected to wiring conditions. Refer to
Simultaneous example 1 to 3. If the communication carries out from amplifier, no need to consider wiring conditions.
Analog Distributor (or communication medium : ex. EP card)
-Pulse Output Shielded Cable For the shielded cables in this example of
24V DC
Example 1 flowmeter installation, use two-wire separately
In this case, Communica SUPPLY + shielded cables.
-tion is possible(up to a – *2 R 250Ω
distance of 2km when a E(10.5 to 30V DC) This supply voltage requires a power sourse
CEV cable is used).
PULSE + Counting input with a maximum output current of no less than
Common E/R.
digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal Electric counter *1(or communication medium : ex. EP card)
For the shielded cables in this
Example 2 Recorder or
example of flowmeter installation,
In this case, Communica Shielded Cable other instrument
use two-wire separately shielded
-tion is possible (up to a 250Ω cables.
distance of 200m when a
SUPPLY + *2
E(16.4 to 30V DC)
This supply voltage requires a power
CEV cable is used) and R R
= 1kΩ).
– Counting input sourse with a maximum output current
of no less than E/R+25mA.
PULSE + Common
The supply voltage requires output
Electric counter impedance no more than 1/1000 of R
digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal *1 (load resistance).
Recorder or
other instrument
Example 3 250Ω
In this case, No communi
+ E(16.4 to 30V DC) This supply voltage requires
-cation is possible (when SUPPLY
R *2 a power sourse with a
shielded cable is not used). – Counting input maximum output current of
PULSE + Common no less than E/R+25mA.

Electric counter *1
digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal

The load resistance of pulse output should be used to 1kΩ, 2W.


The range of load If no translation of the pulse output possible by the cable length or the frequency of the pluse output,
resistance R for the load resistance should be selected by calculation as shown below.
E (V) 0.1
the pulse output. % R (kΩ) % Example of CEV cable capacitance
120 C ( µF ) × f ( kHz ) 6 0.1µF/km
Where
E2 (V) E = Supply voltage (V) C = Cable capacitance (µF)
P (mW) =
R (kΩ) f = Frequency of pulse output (kHz) P = Power ratio of the load resistance
R = Value of load resistance (kΩ) (mW)
*1 : To avoid the influence of external noise, use an electric counter which fits to the pulse frequency.
*2 : Resistor is not necessary in case of an electric counter which can receive contact pulse signal directly. T030301.EPS

3-3 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
3. WIRING

3.4 Wiring Cables and Wires (Black) (White) (Red) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Red) (White) (Black)
Unit : mm

The following should be taken into consideration when


selecting cables for use between the converter and distributor. 80
60
70 70
60
80

50 50
(1) Use 600V PVC insulated wire or equivalent standard
20
wire or cable. 25 95
(Blue)

(2) Use shielded wire in areas susceptible to electrical noise


(both analog and pulse output versions).

Flowmeter

Converter
(3) In areas with high or low ambient temperatures, use Specified
Length (L)
wires or cables suitable for such temperatures. 30m (max.)
(4) In atmospheres where oils or solvents, corrosive gases or
DYC
liquids may be present, use suitable wires or cables.
F030501.EPS
(5) Use cable which withstand temperature up to 60°C and
more, when ambient temperature is more than 60°C. Figure 3.3 DYC Signal Cable

Outer shield
To Flowmeter To Converter
IMPORTANT
T T
A A
For the remote type, use DYC signal cable to connect B B
the converter and remote type flowmeter(DY-N). Inner shield
C
C
T: Only for / MV F030502.EPS

Figure 3.4 Construction of Remote Type Signal Cable


3.5 Connection of the Remote
Type Signal Cable T T

The remote type signal cable is shown in Figure 3.3 and 3.4, A A
and the terminal is shown in Figure 3.5. B B
C
The maximum cable length is 30 m (97.5 feet).
C
Remove terminal box cover and wiring connection dust-cap Flowmeter(DY-N) Converter(DYA)
before wiring. T: Only for /MV

Input Terminal from built-


For remote type the converter has two electrical connections T
in temperature sensor
(cable inlets). Use the left connection as viewed from the Supply
4 to 20 mA DC Output Power Supply
A Input Terminals from 1
terminal box for the DYC signal cable and the right connec- B vortex detector – and Output Signal Terminals
tion for the transmission cable. C Common Terminal Pulse
Pulse Output Terminal
1
F030503.EPS
If a signal cable kit is supplied by YOKOGAWA, both ends
of the cable must be finished in accordance with the Figure 3.5 Terminal of Detector and Converter
following instructions as shown in 3.6.1 and 3.6.2.

Vortex Flow Converter


Signal Cable(DYC)
CAUTION

After completing the signal cable connections, install


the shielded cover to signal cable terminal as shown
in Figure 3.6.
Shield Cover

Power Cable

F030504.EPS

Figure 3.6 Shielded Cover

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 3-4
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
3.WIRING

3.6 Method of Finishing the Signal Cable End(DYC)


3.6.1 For Vortex Flowmeter (DY-N)
Description Figure
1 Strip off the outer polyethylene jacket, outer braided 5 (0.2) 10 (0.4) Unit : mm
shield and inner jacket, and inner braided shield as (approx. inches)
per the dimensions below.
5 (0.2)
90 (3.5)
Black Conductive Layer
T (yellow)

2 Strip off the black conductive layer convering two 40 (1.6) 5 (0.2)
T (Yellow) 3 (0.1)
wires completely, as per the dimensions below. A (Red) or less
Twist each of the conductor and drain wires so that
there are no free strands.
50 (2.0) Black Conductive Layer
60 (2.4)
B (White)

3 Do not short-circuit the conductive layer and the


terminals (A, B, C and T).
4 Strip off about 5 mm (0.2 in.) of insulation for each Drain wires
of wires A, B, and T, and twist the strands of each C T (Yellow)
wire. Twist the inner and outer drain wires together. A (Red)

B (White) 5 (0.2)
5 (0.2) 5 (0.2)

5 Slide FEP (fluorinated ethylene propylene) tubing 5 (0.2) FEP Insulation Tubing
C (Black)
over the twisted inner and outer drain wires C until
the tubing cannot be slid any further, and then cut
off the tubing leaving 5 mm (0.2 in.) of the stranded T (Yellow)
drain wires exposed. A (Red)
B (White)

6 Slide heat shrinkable tubing over the cable end so C Heat Shrinkable Tubing
that the tubing covers the braided shield and
overlaps both the polyethylene jacket and loose
T (Yellow)
wires A, B, C, and T. A (Red)
B (White)

7 Slide a short piece of heat shrinkable tubing over Crimp and Solder Here
Lug tip Heat Shrinkable Tubing
each of wires A, B, C, and T. Install a crimp-on
terminal lug at the tip of each wire. Crimp and
solder each lug. 10

8 Slide each short piece of heat shrinkable tubing


over the crimp sleeve. Heat all pieces of heat
shrinkable tubing with a heat blower or dryer.

Heat Shrinkable Tubing

9 Attach an identification label to the end of the cable.

(*1): Only for /MV T030601.EPS

NOTE 80
BLACK (C) 5 5 10
Unit : mm
NOTE

Check that the insulation resis- WHITE (B)


In case that the cable end finish parts
tance between each wire includ- RED (A)
3MAX
120 assembly is necessary after delivery,
ing the inner shield is 10MΩ or contact your nearest Yokogawa sales
Yellow(T) 50
greater at 500V DC. Ensure that 60
office or the sales representative from
both ends of the wires are 70
F030601.EPS
which you purchased the product. The
disconnected (open-circuited) parts number of DYC cable end finish
during the check. Figure 3.7 parts assembly:
Standard type: F9399AB
Multivariable type (/MV): F9399AD
CAUTION

Do not touch the '' conductive layer" (black area covering the signal cables A and B) to the converter case, terminal,
and other leadwires. If it is touched, operation of the converter may be incorrect. When the cable is terminated,
remove the conductive layer properly.

3-5 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
3. WIRING

3.6.2 For Vortex Flow Converter (DYA)


Description Figure
1 Strip off the outer polyethylene jacket, outer braided 15 (0.6) 100.4)
( Unit : mm
shield and inner jacket, and inner braided shield as (approx. inches)
per the dimensions as shown.
95 5 (0.2)
(3.7)
Black Conductive
Layer T (yellow)

2 Cut of the black conductive layers(convering the


two wires) completely, as per the dimensions below. B (White) 3 (0.1) or less
Twist each of the conductor and drain wires so that Black
A (Red) 40 (1.6) Conductive Layer
there are no free strands. 50 (2.0) 5 (0.2)
T (Yellow(*1))
60 (2.4)

3 Do not short-circuit the conductive layer and the


terminals (A, B, C, G and T).

4 Strip off about 5 mm (0.2 in.) of insulationorf each 5 (0.2)


of wires A, B, andT, and twist the strands of each G
5 (0.2) Drain wires
wire. C

T (Yellow)
5 (0.2) A (Red)
B (White)

5 Slide black FEP (fluor


inated ethylene propylene) 5 (0.2)
FEP InsulationTubing (Black)
tubing over the inner shield dr
ain wire C and lbue
FEP InsulationTubing (Blue)
FEP tubing o ver outer shield drain wire G until G
the tubing cannot be slid any further, and then cut C

off the tubing leaving 5 mm (0.2 in.) of the dr


ain T (Yellow)
wires exposed. 5 (0.2) A (Red)
B (White)

6 Slide heat shr inkable tubing over the cable end so G


C
that the tubing covers the braided shield and BA
T

overlaps both the polyethylene jacket and loose


15 (0.6) 25 (1.0)
wires A, B, C, G, andT.
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
7 Slide a short piece of heat shr
inkable tubing over Lug-Tips Crimp and Solder Heat-shrinkable tubing
each of wires A, ,BC, G, andT. Install a cr
imp-on
terminal lug at the tip of each wire
. Crimp and
10
solder each lug. (0.4)

8 Slide each short piece of heat


shrinkable tubing over the crimp sleeve. Heat all
pieces of heat shrinkable tubing with a heat blower
or dryer.
Heat Shrinkable Tubing

9 Attach an identification label to the end of the cable.

T030602.EPS
(*1): Only for /MV

NOTE 95
BLUE (G)
Unit : mm
NOTE
BLACK (C)
Check that the insulation In case that the cable end finish parts
WHITE (B)
resistance between each wire RED (A) 3
assembly is necessary after delivery,
including the inner shield is MAX
contact your nearest Yokogawa sales
10MΩ or greater at 500V DC. YELOW(T) 50
office or the sales representative from
Ensure that both ends of the 10 10 120 which you purchased the product.
60
wires are disconnected (open- 70
5
The parts number of DYC cable end
circuited) during the check. 80
F030602.EPS finish parts assembly:
Standard type: F9399AA
Figure 3.8 Multivariable type (/MV): F9399AC

CAUTION

Do not touch the '' conductive layer" (black area covering the signal cables A and B) to the converter case, terminal,
and other leadwires. If it is touched, operation of the converter may be incorrect. When the cable is terminated,
remove the conductive layer properly.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 3-6
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
3.WIRING

3.7 Wiring Cautions 3.8 Grounding


(1) Lay wiring as far as possible from electrical noise
sources such as large transformers, motors and power
supplies. IMPORTANT
(2) It is recommended that crimp-on type solderless lugs be
When a lightning protector (option code: /A) is
used for large wire ends.
selected, use a grounding resistance of 10Ω or less.
(3) For general use, it is recommended that conduits and
ducts or racks be used to protect wiring from water or
mechanical damage. A rigid steel conduit or flexible (1) The grounding terminals are located on the inside and
metal conduit is recommended. See Figure 3.9. outside of the terminal area. Either terminal may be
used.
(2) For pulse output version, ground the flowmeter. Also
ground the shielded cable between the converter and the
pulse receiver.
(3) Grounding should satisfy Class D requirements (ground
resistance 100Ω or less).
(4) Use 600V PVC insulated wire for grounding.

Grounding
terminals
Integral Type
F030801.EPS

Figure 3.10
F030701.EPS

Figure 3.9

3-7 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
3. WIRING

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 3-8
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

Data setting can be performed with the three keys on the Description of unit indications and its votes.
front panel (SET,SHIFT and INC) or using a handheld Table 4.1 shows the description of unit indications and
BRAIN(BT) terminal and HART communicator. it's votes.

4.1 Construction of the Display Table 4.1 Unit Indicator

Unit Upper Indication Lower Indication


Figure 4.1 shows the configuration of the digitalYEWFLO
display panel (if equipped). %
m3
1 Data Display
(Upper) Nm3
N
4 Unit Display Sm3
S
kg
3 Alarm Display
t
2 Data Display /h
SET
(Lower) /m
SHIFT INC /s
4 Unit Display
/d
°C (*1)

T040101.EPS
(*1) Only for /MV
5 Setting Keys
F040101.EPS

Figure 4.1 Construction of the Display

1 Data Display(Upper) : Displays flowrate data, setting


data, total data.
2 Data Display(Lower) : Displays total data, alarm data.
3 Alarm Display : Displays alarm of a flow error
and a vibration error.
4 Unit Display : Displays Flowrate unit.
5 Setting Keys : These keys are used to change
flow rate data displays and type
of setting data.

4-1 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.2 Display Contents in Display Section


The display content items are classified in the following three items.
Table 4.2 Mode Name List
Mode (status) Name Display Contents
Flowrate display A mode in which instantaneous flow rates or totalized values are displayed.
mode Display content is usually selected either in display content selection mode or by setting parameters
via BRAIN communication.
Setting mode In this mode, parameter contents are confirmed or data is updated using the setting section. The mode is
changed to this mode when [SET] key is pressed in normal mode.
Alarm number display This mode is overlapped when an alarm is occurring in display mode. The alarm number presentation to
mode indicate alarm contents (about 2 sec) and the normal data display (about 4 sec ) are repeated alternatively.
Mode represents that the system is in a state where the relevant setting or display is possible.
T040201.EPS

l Display Example
SET
SHIFT + SET
Flowrate Display Mode Setting Mode Error Mode

UPPER LOWER Switching NORMAL


Flow rate Total rate of setting INDICATION Alternately
number (4sec)

UPPER LOWER ERROR INDICATION


Flow rate (%) Blank SHIFT (2sec)
This mode display can be selected • When an alarm situation occurs,
below. this mode will replace the current
• Upper display : Flow rate mode (flow rate or setting mode)
• Lower display : Total rate or Blank to show what type of alarm has
occurred.
• Refer to “5.5 Error Code Lists”
about the error descriptions and
error No.

• This mode is used to check parameter


content and rewrite data. This mode can
be called up from the flowrate display
mode by pressing the “SET” key.
• Setting item and setting number can be
changed when pressing “SHFT” key.
• This mode can be called up by pressing
“SET” key while pressing “SHIFT” key
when setting mode is displayed. F040201.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-2
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.3 Display Contents in Display


Section
The display mode is a mode in which instantaneous flow
rates or totalized flow are displayed. In display mode, there
are three display modes as shown in Table 4.3.
Table 4.3 Display Mode
Upper Lower
Name Contents
Display Display
% Display Instantaneous % flow rate is
(Flow rate) displayed.
Engineering Instantaneous flow rate in an
Display Unit engineering unit is displayed.
Totalized Totalized flow displayed
Display without indicating the decimal
point.
% Display Instantaneous temperature is
(Temperature) displayed.
(*1) In this case, “t” is displayed
simultaneously (Refer to
Figure 4.2).

Temperature Temperature value is


display(*1) displayed.
Blank ------
T040301.EPS
(*1) When option code /MV is selected,
this function is available.

F040301.EPS

Figure 4.2 Example


Display mode can be changed using the BT200 terminal or
the indicator setting section.

• For operation using BT200, perform changes using the


parameter item “ B30:UPPER DISP” and “B31:LOWER
DISP” referring to section 5. Parameters.
• For operation using indicator, change B30 and B31
parameter item number to display an appropriate display.

IMPORTANT

After setting a parameter, keep the power on for at


least 30 seconds.
If the power of flowmeter is turned off, a parameter
setting is released.

4-3 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.3.1 Change the Display Mode from % Display to Engineering Unit


The display mode can be changed referring 5.3 parameter list.

Indication of % Indicate “ 01 ” of
display. engineering unit
referring 5.3
parameter list.
SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SET ” key. Press “ SET ” key.

Enter the setting Ensure the setting


mode. data.

SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SHIFT ” key. Press “ SET ” key.

Enter the parameter Finish the setting.


item.

SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ INC ” key any time. Press “ SET ” and “ SHIFT ” key.

Indicate “ 30 ” Return to display


referring 5.3 mode.
parameter list.

SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SET ” key.

Enter the data


IMPORTANT
input item.
After setting a parameter, keep the power on for at
least 30 seconds.
SET If the power of flowmeter is turned off, a parameter
setting is released.
SHIFT INC

Press “ INC ” key.


F040302.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-4
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.3.2 Indicate the Total Rate in the Lower Display


The display mode can be changed referring 5.3 parameter list.

Indication of Indicate “ 01 ” of
engineering unit lower the display
display. item referring 5.3
Lower display is parameter list.
SET “ Blank ”. SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SET ” key. Press “ SET ” key.

Enter to the setting Ensure the setting


mode. data.

SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SHIFT ” key. Press “ SET ” key.

Enter to the Finish the setting.


parameter item.

SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ INC ” key any time. Press “ SET ” and “ SHIFT ” key.

Indicate “ 31 ” Return to display


referring 5.3 mode.
parameter list.

SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SET ” key.

Enter the data input


IMPORTANT
item.
After setting a parameter, keep the power on for at
least 30 seconds.
SET If the power of flowmeter is turned off, a parameter
setting is released.
SHIFT INC

Press “ INC ” key.


F040303.EPS

4-5 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.4 Setting Mode • When completing setting, press “SHIFT” key and “SET”
key simultaneously. The mode move to the “display
The setting mode is used for checking parameters and mode”.
rewriting data. The following is an overview of the setting
mode.
IMPORTANT

After setting a parameter, keep the power on for at


NOTE least 30 seconds.
If the power of flowmeter is turned off, a parameter
• Refer to 5.3 Parameter List and 5.4 Parameter
setting is released.
description for information on how to change
setting.

4.4.1 Structure of Setting Mode Display


Simple parameter sheet
IN this sheet, a setting flow chart and the parameter list
required to operate digitalYEWFLO is indicated.

Item number
Change item number using
“SHIFT” key and “INC”key.

SET

Data number
SHIFT INC
Change the data number
using “SHIFT” key and
“INC” key.
F040401.EPS

Flowrate Display Mode

SHIFT+SET SET

Parameter Setting Mode

Select Item

SHIFT : Menu Item Number


SHIFT+SET SET INC : Inc. Menu / Item Number

Set Data

Select Type
INC : Inc. Data Number

Numeric Value Setting Type


SET SHIFT : Move Cursor
INC : Inc. Numeric Value

SHIFT or INC

Check Setting Data

SET

Fix Setting Data


F040401_1.EPS

Figure 4.3 Indicator Construction and Parameter Setting


Procedure
IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-6
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES
4.4.2 Method of Parameter Setting
Input method of numeric data
Example 1: Change the span from 100m3/h to 150m3/h
The setting mode can be changed referring 5.3 parameter list

Indication of % flow Ensure the setting


rate. data.

SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SET ” key. Press “ SET ” key.

Enter to the setting Complete the Setting.


mode.
(Span number is
“ B10 ”)
SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SET ” key. Press “ SET ” and “ SHIFT ” key.

Enter to data number Return to display


item. mode.

SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SHIFT ” key any time.

Move the position to


input the data.

SET
IMPORTANT
SHIFT INC
After setting a parameter, keep the power on for at
least 30 seconds.
Press “ INC ” key any time. If the power of flowmeter is turned off, a parameter
setting is released.

Set “ 5 ” and indicate


“ 150m3/h ”.

SET

SHIFT INC

Press “ SET ” key.


F040402.EPS

4-7 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

Input method of selection items


Example 2: Change the pulse output to alarm output.
The setting mode can be changed referring 5.3 parameter list

Indication of % unit. Indicate “ 03 ” of


alarm output item
referring 5.3
parameter list.
SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SET ” key. Press “ SET ” key.

Enter to the setting Ensure the setting.


mode.

SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SHIFT ” key. Press “ SET ” key.

Enter to the Finish the parameter


parameter item. setting.

SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ INC ” key any time. Press “ SET ” and “ SHIFT ” key.

Indicate “ 20 ” Return to display


referring 5.3 mode.
parameter list.

SET SET

SHIFT INC SHIFT INC

Press “ SET ” key.

Enter to the data


IMPORTANT
input item.
After setting a parameter, keep the power on for at
least 30 seconds.
SET If the power of flowmeter is turned off, a parameter
setting is released.
SHIFT INC

Press “ INC ” key any time.


F040403.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-8
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.5 Operation for the BT200 (2) Connecting BT200 to Flow Converter
Removing a cover and indicator, the terminals for brain
This section describes the operation procedures using a
communication are provided on the circuit board.
BRAIN Terminal (BT200). For details on the functions of the
Connect BT200 to the terminal of HHT-COM on the
digitalYEWFLO, refer to 5.3 Parameter List. And also, see
circuit board.
the “BT200 Instruction Manual” (IM 1C0A11-01E) for more
detailed Information.

4.5.1 Connection Method for the BT200

(1) Connecting the BT200 to a 4 to 20mA DC


Transfer Line
The communication signal of the digitalYEWFLO is
superimposed onto the 4 to 20mA DC analog signal to
be transferred.

digitalYEWFLO 4 to 20mA DC
Signal
Control room
transmission
Inter mediate Terminal Receiving
SUPPLY line Board instrument
terminals Display

SUPPLY Indicator Mounting Circuit board


Screw (2 PCS)
Receiver
Resistance P
250 to 600Ω

BT200 BT200 BT200 BT200 COM TP2


F040501.EPS

Figure 4.4 Communicating for a 4 to 20mA DC Signal HHT

Line

BT200
F040502.EPS

IMPORTANT
Figure 4.5 Connection of BT200 to Flow Converter
The communicable distance of the transmission line is
restricted depending on the wiring method. Refer to 3.
WIRING.

IMPORTANT

After setting a parameter, keep the power on for at


least 30 seconds.
If the power of flowmeter is turned off, a parameter
setting is released.

4-9 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.5.2 Displaying Flow Rate Data Function key


The functions of the function keys vary with the commands
Flowrate data can be displayed on the BT200 screen
being displayed on the display panel.
according to the following procedure.
Table 4.4

Command Description
Turn the power on and the
———WELCOME——— screen on the left ADJ Calls up the adjustment menu.
BRAIN TERMINAL “Please wait....” is
ID:BT200 CAPS/caps Changes the uppercase / lowercase mode.
displayed for a few
Check connection minutes. CLR Clears entered data / deletes all data.
Push ENTER key COPY* Prints parameters on the screen.
UTIL FEED
DATA Updates parameter data.
DEL Deletes one character.
DIAG Calls up the self-check screen.
ESC Returns to the preceding screen.
PARAM Pressing the “ENTER” key FEED* Paper feed.
01:MODEL causes the initial data
digitalYEWFLO screen on the left to be HOME Calls up the home menu (A : DISPLAY).
02:TAG NO.
displayed. LIST* Prints all parameters of the menus.
03:SELF CHECK The tag number
GOOD specified upon NO Setting stop / re-setting. Returns to the
OK ordering is entered. previous screen.
OK Goes to the next screen.

or PARM Parameter number setting mode.


PON/POFF* Printer output of data whose setting was
changed Mode on / off.
MENU PRNT* Changes to the prints mode.
A:DISPLAY Inverse Video Bar
B:EASY SETUP SET Calls up the setting menu (B : SETTING).
C:BASIC SETUP
D:AUX. SETUP Pressing the “F4” or SLOT Returns to the slot selection screen.
E:METER SETUP “ENTER” causes the menu
H:ADJUST screen on the left to be GO* Starts print out.
HOME SET ADJ ESC displayed. STOP* Stops printing.
UTIL Transfers to the utility screen.
*The command is available only for BT-200-P00
T040501.EPS

With “A : DISPLAY”
PARAM
A10:FLOW RATE(%) displayed on the menu
80.0% panel in the inverse video
A20:FLOW RATE bar, press “ENTER” key
100m3/h and the flow data screen
A30:TOTAL
1417 appears.
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC Maximum three data items
can be displayed on one
screen.

PARAM Executing Function Key


A10:FLOW RATE(%) F1 : Updates the current data.
80.0% F2 : Displays the self-check
A20:FLOW RATE
100m3/h screen.
A30:TOTAL F3 : Displays the parameter
1417 print sreen.
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC F4 : Returns to the previous
panel. (menu panel)

Function Key
F040503.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-10
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.5.3 Setting Parameters


This section describes the setting method using a BRAIN
Terminal (BT200). For details on the method, refer to 5.3
Parameter List.

(1) Setting Flow Span


Example : Change flow span 100m3/h to 150m3/h

MENU Enter menu item, and press SET The data setting can be
A:DISPLAY “ ” key. B10:FLOW SPAN completed.
B:EASY SETUP Move the inverse video bar 150.00 m3/h
C:BASIC SETUP
D:AUX. SETUP to “B : EASY SETUP”. If data setting is missing,
E:METER SETUP press “F3” key and reset the
H:ADJUST data.
HOME SET ADJ ESC FEED NO OK

or

PARAM Move the inverse video bar PARAM Setting is completed.


B10:FLOW SPAN to “B10 : FLOW SPAN”. B10:FLOW SPAN The screen returns to the
100 m3/h 100 m3/h preceding screen when the
B15:DAMPING B15:DAMPING
4 sec 4 sec “F4” (ESC) key is pressed.
B20:CONTACT OUT B20:CONTACT OUT
SCALED PULSE SCALED PULSE
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC DATA DIAG PRNT ESC

F040504.EPS

SET The data setup screen is


B10:FLOW SPAN displayed. IMPORTANT
100 m3/h If the security screen is
0 displayed, enter the security After setting a parameter, keep the power on for at
code. least 30 seconds.
DEL CLR ESC
If the power of flowmeter is turned off, a parameter
setting is released.

SET Enter “150” using the


B10:FLOW SPAN alphanumeric keys.
100.00 m3/h
150

DEL CLR ESC

SET Pressing the enter key,


B10:FLOW SPAN inverse video bar is flashed.
100.00 m3/h
150

print off
F2:printer on
FEED POFF NO

4-11 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

(2) Change the Pulse Output to Alarm Output.

MENU Enter menu item, and press SET Pressing the enter key,
A:DISPLAY “ ” key. B20:CONTACT OUT inverse video bar is flashed.
B:EASY SETUP Move the inverse video bar SCALED PULSE
C:BASIC SETUP ALARM
D:AUX. SETUP to “B : EASY SETUP”.
E:METER SETUP Print off
H:ADJUST F2:printer on
HOME SET ADJ ESC FEED POFF NO

PARAM Item B menu is displayed. SET The data setting can be


B10:FLOW SPAN B20:CONTACT OUT completed.
100 m3/h ALARM
B15:DAMPING
4 sec If data setting is missing,
B20:CONTACT OUT press “F3” key and rewrite
SCALED PULSE the data.
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC FEED NO OK

2 Times

PARAM Move the inverse video bar PARAM Setting is completed.


B10:FLOW SPAN to “B20 : CONTACT OUT”. B10:FLOW SPAN The screen returns to the
100 m3/h 100 m3/h preceding screen when the
B15:DAMPING B15:DAMPING
4 sec 4 sec “F4” (ESC) key is pressed.
B20:CONTACT OUT B20:CONTACT OUT
SCALED PULSE ALARM
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC DATA DIAG PRNT ESC

F040505.EPS

SET Pressing “ENTER”, cause IMPORTANT


B20:CONTACT OUT the data setup screen to be
SCALED PULSE displayed.
< OFF > After setting a parameter, keep the power on for at
< SCALED PULSE >
<UNSCALED PULSE> If the security screen least 30 seconds.
appears, If the power of flowmeter is turned off, a parameter
ESC enter the security code.
setting is released.

4 Times

SET Move the inverse video bar


B20:CONTACT OUT to “ALARM”.
SCALED PULSE
<UNSCALED PULSE>
< FREQUENCY >
< ALARM >

ESC

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-12
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.6 Operation for HART Commu- 3) Select “Simulation” and press [∅].
nicator 4) Select “YOKOGAWA” from the manufactur-
ers
The communication control function with HHT, BRAIN list by pressing [¬] and then pressing [∅] to
Terminal (BT200) is stated at 4.5 Operation for the BT200. enter selection.
digitalYEWFLO is available not only BRAIN Terminal 5) Select the
[Example]
HART Communicator
(BT200) but also HART Communicator as remote control via
model name of Fld dev rev
1 Dev v1 , DD v2
Versions
HHT. 2 Dev v2 , DD v1 1 and 2
the instrument
Main functions and parameters are the same with BRAIN (i.e.
Terminal (BT200). Moreover, digitalYEWFLO has unique digitalYEWFLO)
“The communicator DD
parameters of HART Communicator. by pressing [¬] supports Versions 1 and 2.”
The amplifier has been pre-configured at the factory, so no
and then press F040601-2.EPS

setup should be required prior to installation. If your process [∅] to show the DD of the communicator.
conditions have changed and reprogramming is required, the
menu/parameter configuration list for digitalYEWFLO is in
4.6.12 Menu Tree. Refer to the instructions provided with NOTE
your HART communicator for operation details. The QUICK
START section of this manual will address only those In case of using HART Communicator, setting
parameters which must be set to establish the operation of the from indicator is not available.
meter for a particular application. The Menu Tree will cross-
reference the BRAIN parameters to the corresponding HART
parameters.
Note: HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communica- CAUTION
tion Foundation.
In case of using Burst mode, setting from amplifier
unit is not available.
CAUTION

Matching of communicator DD and instrument DD 4.6.1 Interconnection between


Before using the Model 275 HART Communicator, digitalYEWFLO and HART Commu-
check that the DD (Device Description) installed in nicator
the communicator matches that of the instruments
to be set up. To check the DD in the instrument or The HART Communicator can interface with the
the HART Communicator, follow the steps below. If digitalYEWFLO from the control room, the digitalYEWFLO
the correct DD is not installed in the communicator, site, or any other wiring termination point in the loop,
you must upgrade the DD at the official HART provided there is a minimum load resistance of 230 ý
between the connection and the receiving instrument. To
programming sites. For communication tools other
communicate, it must be connected in parallel with the
than Model 275 HART Communicator, contact the
digitalYEWFLO, and the connections must be non-polarized.
respective vendors for upgrade information.
Figure 4.6 illustrates the wiring connections for a direct
1. Checking the DD in the instrument
interface at the digitalYEWFLO site. The HART Communi-
1) Connect the communicator to the instrument
cator can be used for remote access from any terminal strip
to be set up.
as well.
2) Open “Device Setup” [Example]
DYF :
and press [∅]. Review
Fld dev rev digitalYEWFLO
Control room

3) Select “Review” and 2 4 to 20 mA DC signal line


Terminal board

press [∅].
SUPPLY +

SUPPLY – Relaying
4) By pressing [NEXT] HELP PREV NEXT EXIT
terminals

or [PREV], locate “The instrument DD is Version 2” Receiving instrument


F040601-1.EPS load resistance:

“Fld dev rev” to show HART HART


230 Ω to 600 Ω

Communicator Communicator
the DD of the instrument. HART
Communicator Model 275 Model 275
Model 275
2. Checking the DD in Model 275 HART Commu-
F040602.EPS

nicator. Figure 4.6 Interconnection Diagram


1) Turn on only the communicator alone.
2) Select “Utility” from the main menu and
press [∅].

4-13 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.6.2 Keys and Functions of Model 275

Communication Cable

LCD (Liquid crystal display)


(21 characters × 8 lines)

Function Keys
Functions of the keys are indicated on the
display.

DYF :
Process Variables
1 PV %rnge
2 PV
3 PV AO
4 Totl 12348853
5 Reverse Totl Move the inverse video bar (cursor) on the
HELP SAVE HOME
display to select the desired item.

Hot key
Open the Hot key Menu as follows:
1. PV Span
2. Wrt Protect Menu
Power ON/OFF

1. Change the display contents.


2. Move the position where a number or
character is to be entered.
Example
Pressing calls up the display
corresponding to the item pointed at with the
cursor.
Pressing returns to the previous display.
(See 4.6.5 Calling up Menu Address.)

Alphanumeric Keys
1. Enter numbers and characters.
2. Select the desired menu item with the
corresponding number.
Example
Pressing a single key enters the number.
Pressing the key with the shift key enters
the alphabetic character.
Shift Keys
(Press) (ENTER)
Use to enter
ABC
alphabetic characters. To enter “7”, 7 ‘7’
ABC
To enter “C”, 7 ‘C’
F040603.EPS

Figure 4.7 HART Communicator

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-14
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.6.3 Display
The HART Communicator automatically searches for
digitalYEWFLO on the 4 to 20 mA loop when it is turned
on. When the HART Communicator is connected to the
digitalYEWFLO, it displays “Online” menu as shown below.
(If digitalYEWFLO is not found, the communicator displays
the message “No Device Found. Press OK....” Press the OK
‘F4’ function key and the main menu appears. Retry after
confirming the connection with the digitalYEWFLO.)

Manufacturer’s Field Device Tag (8 Characters) <1>


Type Code

DYF: appears when the


<2> voltage level of the
Online
battery is low
1 Device setup
<3> 2 PV % rnge 0.0875kg/min The arrow mark
3 PV AO 5,600mA corresponding to the
<4> 4 PV URV 0.8746kg/min pressed key appears.

<5> HELP SAVE HOME ENTER The highlighting cursor

F1 F2 F3 F4
Function keys

F040604.EPS

Figure 4.8 Display

<1> appears and flashes during communication between


the HART Communicator and the digitalYEWFLO. At
Burst mode*, appears.
<2> The current display menu title appears.
<3> Each item in menu of <2> appears.
<4> and/or appear when the items are scrolled out of
the display.
<5> On any given menu, the label appearing above a
function key indicates the function of that key for the
current menu.

* Refer to 4.6.7 Unique Functions of HART Communicator

4-15 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.6.4 Calling Up Menu Addresses Key operation


There are two choices to select the desired menu item.
4.6.11 Menu Tree shows the configuration of Online Menu
which is needed for the operation with HART Communica- 1. Use the or key to select the desired item, and
tor. The desired item can be displayed with ease by under-
standing the menu configuration. then press the key.
2. Press the number key displayed for the desired item.
When the HART Communicator is connected to the
• To return to the previous display, press the key,
digitalYEWFLO, “Online” menu will be displayed after the
power is turned on (See Figure 4.8). Call up the desired item EXIT (F4) or ESC (F3).
as follows:

Example: Call up the “Tag” to change the tag number.


F040604_1.EPS

Check where “Tag” is located in the menu configuration. Then, call up “Tag” on the display according to the menu configuration.

Device setup process variables Tag


DYF: FI-100
1.Process variables Diag/Service Span Tag
2.Diag/Service Basic setup PV Damp FI-100
FI-100
3.Basic setup Detailed setup Device Info
4.Detailed setup Review
5.Review HELP DEL ESC ENTER

Display Operation

1 DYF :
or STU Display 1 appears when the HART Communicator is turned on.
Online 1
1 Device setup
2 PV Select “Device setup”.
3 PV AO
4 PV URV

DEL SET ESC ENTER

2 DYF :
×2
Device setup Select “Basic setup”.
1 Process variables
2 Diag/Service or
3 Basic setup
YZ /
4 Detailed setup
3
5 Review
DEL SAVE HOME ENTER

3 DYF :
×4 Select “Tag”.
Basic setup
1 Tag
2 Span or
3 PV Damp
MNO
4 Device info
5

HELP SAVE HOME ENTER

The display for Tag setting appears.


4 DYF : (The default value of “Tag” is blank.)
Tag
FI-100
FI-100

HELP DEL ESC ENTER


F040604_2.EPS

NOTE

Setting parameters on the display unit of the digitalYEWFLO is not possible during HART Communication.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-16
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.6.5 Entering, Setting and Sending Data Display Operation

The data which are input with the keys are set in the HART 1 DYF : F4 Press ENTER (F4) to
Tag
Communicator by pressing ENTER (F4). Then, by pressing FIC-1A
set the data in the
SEND (F2), the data are sent to the digitalYEWFLO. Note (ENTER)
HART Communicator
that the data are not set in the digitalYEWFLO if SEND (F2) HELP DEL ESC ENTER after entering the data.
is not pressed. All the data set with the HART Communicator
is held in memory unless power is turned off, so every data 2 DYF : F2 Press SEND (F2) to
Basic setup
can be sent to the digitalYEWFLO at one lot. 1 Tag
2 Span
send the data to the
3 PV Damp (SEND)
4 Device info digitalYEWFLO.
Operation * is flashing during
HELP SEND HOME ENTER
Entering data on the “Tag” setting display. communication.
On alphabetic characters, only capital letters can be used for 3 DYF :
Basic setup
setting Tag No. with HART Communicator. 1 Tag SEND label changed
2 Span
3 PV Damp to SAVE label, and
4 Device info
the transmission is
HELP SAVE HOME ENTER
Example: Set “FIC-1A”.
completed.
5. Tag
Press HOME (F3),
and return “Online
Call up “Tag” setting display. Menu”.
F040605_2.EPS

1. Device setup 3. Basic setup 5. Tag

1 DYF :
4.6.6 Parameters Configuration
Tag

IMPORTANT
HELP DEL ESC ENTER
Do not turn off the digitalYEWFLO just after HART
Communicator settings (sending) have been made. If
On the setting display shown above, enter the data as follows:
the digitalYEWFLO is turned off less than 30 seconds
Character to Operation Display after parameters have been set, the set data will not
be entered be stored and the data returns to previous settings.
DEF
F 8 F
Parameters of HART Communicator is constructed hierarchi-
cally. The menu tree for Online menu is shown in 4.6.11
GHI
I 9 F I Menu Tree.

See 5.4 Parameter Description about the usage of each


ABC
C F I C parameter. Note the differences between parameters on
7
digitalYEWFLO display and those on HART Communicator.

*:+ The Online menu summary is shown below.


- – F I C -
Table 4.6.1 Online Menu Summary
STU No. Display Item Contents
1 1 F I C - 1
1 Device setup Set parameters for digitalYEWFLO.

ABC 2 PV Display process value in engineering unit.


A 7 F I C - 1 A
3 PV AO Display analog output in mA.
F040605_1.EPS 4 PV URV Display set span in engineering unit.
T040601.EPS

4-17 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.6.7 Unique Functions of HART Commu- Multi HHT communication


nicator Corresponding to discriminating communication between two
HHTs.
Check on communication error
When each error, over run framing error, parity error or Device ID setting
buffer overflow error is detected, the data including the Device ID is set in an unsigned integer number of 3 bytes.
informations of errors is returned, and the error message is
indicated on HHT.
4.6.8 Data Renewing
Real time monitoring 4-20mA output
‘%’ output, actual flow rate and totalized value are men- There are two methods to load the data of digitalYEWFLO
tioned as same as BRAIN communicator. And furthermore 4- to HART Communicator, periodic data renewing and
20mA output is monitored on real time. discretionary data renewing.

(1) Periodic Data Renewing


Time recording
The following data are renewed in 0.5 to 2 seconds
cycle.
Online ⇒ 1.Device setup ⇒ 4.Detailed setup
PV, PV % rnge, PV AO, Totl
⇒ 4. Device info ⇒ 5.Date
(2) Discretionary Data Renewing
F040606_1.EPS
The following data can be loaded from/to
Day, month and year can be set in a number of 2 figures.
digitalYEWFLO. Up load can be done with SAVE (F2)
on any online menu, and down load can be done on
Multi drop communication
Saved Configuration menu in Offline menu. (Refer to
Field devices in multidrop mode refer to the connection of
HART Communicator Manual.)
several field devices on a communication single line. Up to
15 field devices can be connected when set in the multidrop
mode. To activate multidrop communication, the field device 4.6.9 Checking for Problems
address must be changed to a number from 1 to 15. This
change deactivates the 4 to 20mA output and turns it 4mA The self-diagnostic function digitalYEWFLO is stated at
output and turns it 4mA. Chapter 6. By using HART Communicator, it is also
available to carry out in “Test/Status” parameter. Exam for
each error.
Online ⇒ 1.Device setup ⇒ 4.Detailed setup
⇒ 4.Device info ⇒ 6.Dev id *Calling up “Diag/Service” setting display.
F040606_2.EPS
1.Device setup -> 2.Diag/Service
Continuously data returning (Burst mode)

NOTE

In case of using Burst mode, setting from


amplifier unit is not available.

digitalYEWFLO continuously sends the data stored in it


when the burst mode it set “ON”. Either one of instantaneous
flow rate, output in % and current output can be selected and
sent. (Note: This mode is preserved after the converter has
been turned off.)

The interval of sending data in this mode is the same as the


common specification of HART communicator.

*Calling up “Burst option” display.

Online ⇒ 1.Device setup ⇒ 4.Detailed setup


⇒ 3.Output setup ⇒ 6.HART output ⇒ 3.Burst mode
⇒ 1.Burst option
F040606_3.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-18
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.6.10 Write Protect Joker Password


The Joker Password is reserved for forgetting the password.
Write protect function is provided to inhibit parameter
Though a password had been already set, the Write protect
change. That becomes active by entering a password in “New
mode is able to release to inhibit status temporary be entering
password”. Write protect status is released for 10 minutes by
the Joker Password, “YOKOGAWA”.
entering the password in “Enable wrt 10min”.

Setting the Password


HOT KEY ⇒ 2.Wrt protect menu ⇒ 2.Enable wrt 10min

HOT KEY ⇒ 2.Wrt protect menu ⇒ 3.New password DYF: Enter a password into
Enter current
Password to enable to “YOKOGAWA”.
The first indication of Wire protect Write for 10
DYF:
minutes: Press ENTER(F4).
Enter new password to
change state of write menu is “1.Write protect ⇒ No” after YOKOGAWA
protect: password setting, it shows “Yes”. DEL ABORT ENTER
F040607_4.EPS
Enter a password into .
DEL ABORT ENTER Press ENTER(F4). Software seal
DYF: Enter a password into again. The “Software seal” menu is reserved as a evidence so that
Re-enter new password
within 30 seconds: Press ENTER(F4). user is able to confirm whether the Joker password is used or
*****
Then, “Change to new password” is not. This evidence is saved.
***** indicated.
DEL ABORT ENTER
F040607_1.EPS
DYF: The first indication Software seal
Write protect menu
1.Write protect No manu is “4.Software seal ⇒ keep”
2.Enable wrt 10min after the joker password setting, it
HOT KEY ⇒ 2.Wrt protect menu ⇒ 2.Enable wrt 10min 3.New password
4.Software seal shows “Break”.
F040607_2.EPS
F040607_5.EPS

“Enable Write” release write protect status for 10 minutes.


While write protect status is released, enter a new password
in the “New Password”.

It will not be possible to set a new password when 10


minutes have elapsed.

If a parameter, which is able to rewrite, it changed during it


is in “Enable wrt 10min”, releasing time is extended for more
10 minutes as of the time.

DYF: Enter a password into .


Enter current
Password to enable to Press ENTER(F4).
Write for 10
minutes:
Then, “Release the write protection
for 10 minutes.” is indicated.
DEL ABORT ENTER
F040607_3.EPS

NOTE

• When the write protect function is active (its


menu bar shows “Yes”), data setting changes
in all parameters of digitalYEWFLO are inhib-
ited and cannot be changed using the HART
communicator.
• If 8 characters are input as “space”, the Write
protect function is in release status irrespective
of time.
• If both digitalYEWFLO and HART Communica-
tor power off and on again within 10 minutes
after releasing of write protect status, “Enable
Write” becomes unavailable.

4-19 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4.6.11 Menu Tree

[r] : read
Offline New Configuration [cr] : continuous read
Saved Cpnfiguration [w] : write
Online [sel] : select
Frequency [#] : method
Utility {} : Only for
Option code /MV
<> : Parameter No.
in display and BRAIN
Hot Key Flow span communicator
Wrt protect menu Write protect No,Yes
Enable wrt 10min [#]
New passward [#]
Software seal
Keep,Break

1 Process 1 PV [cr] <A20>


variables 2 PV % rnge [cr] <A10>
3 A01 [cr]
4 Total [cr] <A30>
{5 temp} [cr] <A41>
{6 TV % rnge} [cr] <A40>
{7 A03} [cr]

2 Diag/Service
1 Self/test status 1 Self test [#]
2 Loop test [#] 2 Status Status group 1[r] (*8)
3 Test output[#] Status group 2[r] (*9)
4 D/A trim[#]<H10, H11> (Status group 3)[r] (*10)
5 Scaled D/A trim[#] 1 Out analog[r&w] <J10>
2 Out pulse[r&w] <J20>
3 Out status <J30>
4 End Off [r&w sel]
On

3 Basic setup
1 Tag <C10>
2 Easy setup [r&w] 1 Contact out[#] <B20> Off
Scaled pulse 1 Pulse rate[r&w] <B21>
Unscaled pulse
Frequency 1 Frequency at 100%[r&w]<B22>
Alarm
Flow SW(Low:On) 1 Setting level[r&w] <B23>
Flow SW(Low:Off)

2 Display mode <B30>


1 Upper display <B30> Flow rate(%) [r&w sel]
Flow rate
{Temp (%)}
Online Menu
2 Lower display <B31> Blank [r&w sel]
1 Device setup
Total
2 PV [cr]
{Temp}
3 AO1 [cr]
4 Flow Span [r] 3 Totalizer <B31>
5 Mode [cr] 1 Total[cr] <A30>
2 Total start/stop <B40> Stop [r&w sel]
Start
3 Total rate[r&w] <B45>
4 Total reset[w,#] <B47>

{4 Analog out select}[#]


<B50> Flow
Temp 1 Temp unit <D20> (*5)
2 Temp 0% [r&w] <B51>
3 Temp 100% [r&w] <B52>
4 Temp error out <F58>
5 End

0% [r&w sel]
Out limit(H)
Process temp

to be continued to next page F040608_1.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-20
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

3 Fluid [#] <C20> Liquid:Volume 1 Volumetric unit <C22> Cum [r&w sel](*2)
Gas/Steam:Volume k Cum
L
Cuft
3 Basic setup m Cuft
k Cuft
gal
k gal
Impgal
k Impgal
bbl
m bbl
k bbl

2 Time unit <C40>


s [r&w sel](*1)
min
h
d
3 End

Liquid:Mass
Gas/Steam:Mass 1 Density unit <C25> kg/Cum [r&w sel](*6)
lb/Cuft
lb/gal
lb/Impgal

2 Process density[r&w] <C26>


3 Mass unit <C27> Kg [r&w sel](*3)
MetTon
lb
Online Menu
k lb
1 Device setup
2 PV [cr] 4 Time unit <C40> (*1)
3 AO1 [cr] 5 End
4 Flow Span [cr]
5 Mode Gas:STD/Normal

1 Temp unit <C30> deg C [r&w sel](*5)


2 Process temp[r&w] <C31> deg F
3 Base temp[r&w] <C32>
4 Pressure unit <C33> MPa abs [r&w sel](*5)
kPa abs
kg/Sqcm abs
bar abs
psia

5 Process pressure[r&w] <C34>


6 Base pressure[r&w] <C35>
7 Deviation[r&w] <C36>
8 STD/Normal unit <C37>
NmlCum [r&w sel](*4)
k NmlCum
M NmlCum
NmlL
StdCum
k StdCum
M StdCum
StdL
StdCuft
k StdCuft
M Stdcuft
9 Time unit <C40> (*1)
10 End

4 Flow span[r&w]
5 PV Damp[r&w]
<B15>
[r] : read
[cr] : continuous read
This message is indicated in case of not setting up [w] : write
"moniter only","Not use" at "Thermometer/Function" [sel] : select
[#] : method
Now *** setting mode of thermometer. Please set at another menu. {} : Only for
Process abort. Option code /MV
<> : Parameter No.
*** is the parameter set up at "Thermometer/Function" in display and BRAIN
communicator

to be continued to next page to be continued to mark<*1> in a next page


F040608_2.EPS

4-21 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

1 Characterize meter 1 Nominal size <E10> 15mm [r&w sel]


25mm
40mm
50mm
80mm
100mm
4 Detailed setup 150mm
200mm
250mm
300mm
400mm

2 Body type <E20>


Standatd [r&w sel]
High pressure
Low flow unit(1)
Low flow unit(2)
3 Sensor type <E30>
Standatd [r&w sel]
High temperature
Low temperature

4 K-factor setup
1 K-factor unit <E40> p/l [r&w sel]
p/gal
p/Impgal

2 K-factor[r&w] <E41>
5 Detector No. [r&w]

<*1>
2 PV unit
1 Fluid[#] <C20> Liquid:Volume 1 Volumetric unit <C22> (*2)
Online Menu Gas/Steam:Volume 2 Time unit <C40> (*1)
3 End
1 Device setup
2 PV [cr]
Liquid:Mass 1 Density unit <C25> (*6)
3 AO1 [cr]
Gas/Steam:Mass 2 Process density[r&w] <C26>
4 Flow Span [cr]
5 Mode 3 Mass unit <C27> (*3)
4 Time unit <C40> (*1)
5 End
Gas:STD/Normal
1 Temp unit <C30> (*5)
2 Process temp[r&w] <C31>
3 Base temp[r&w] <C32>
4 Pressure unit <C33> (*7)
5 Process pressure[r&w] <C34>
6 Base pressure[r&w] <C35>
7 Deviation[r&w] <C36>
8 STD/Normal unit <C37> (*4)
9 Time unit <C40> (*1)
10 End

2 Special unit[#] <D40>


No
Yes 1 Base unit[r] <D41>
2 User's unit[r&w] <D42>
3 Conversion factor[r&w] <D43>
4 End

[r] : read
[cr] : continuous read
[w] : write
[sel] : select
[#] : method
{} : Only for
Option code /MV
<> : Parameter No.
in display and BRAIN
communicator

to be continued to next page F040608_3.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-22
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

3 Configure outputs 1 Analog output 1 Flow span[r&w] <B10>


2 Outlimit(H)[r&w] <D30>
3 Burn out[r] <D35>

4 Detailed setup
2 Contact output [#] Off
<B20> Scaled pulse 1 Pulse rate[r&w] <B21>
Unsdcled pulse
Frequency 1 Frequency at 100%[r&w] <B22>
Alarm
Flow SW(Low:On) 1 Setting level[r&w] <B23>
Flow SW(Low:Off)

3 Display mode
1 Upper display <B30> Flow rate(%) [r&w sel]
Flow rate
{Temp(%)}

2 Lower display <B31> Blank [r&w sel]


Total
(Temp)

4 Totalizer
1 Total[cr] <A30>
2 Total start/stop <B40> Stop [r&w sel]
Start

3 Total rate[r&w] <B45>


4 Total reset[w,#] <B47>

5 HART output
1 Poller addr[r&w]
Online Menu 2 Num req preams[r]
3 Burst mode Off [r&w sel]
1 Device setup
2 PV [cr] On
3 AO1 [cr]
4 Burst option PV [w sel]
4 Flow Span [cr]
5 Mode %range/current
Process vars/crnt
4 Signal processing

1 PV Damp[r&w] <B15>
2 Low cut[r&w] <D10>
3 Temp setup 1 Temp unit <D20> (*5)
2 Process temp[r&w] <D21>
4 Density setup
1 Density unit <D25> (*6)
2 Process density[r&w] <D26>
5 Maintenance 1 TLA[r&w] <K10>
2 Signal level[r&w] <K20>
3 Noise balance mode <K25> Auto [r&w sel]
Manual 1 Set noise ratio[r&w] <K26>
Tuning at zero flow 2 End
4 Noise ratio[cr or w] <K26>
1 Velocity[cr] <K30>
5 Maintenance data
2 Span velosity[cr] <K32>
3 Vortex frequency[cr] <K34>
4 Span frequency[cr] <K36>
(5 Density) <K38>

6 Error record <K40>


Err record reset[w,#]
Er record status 1[cr] (*11)
Er recprd status 2[cr] (*12)
(Er record status 3[cr]) (*13)

7 High vibration <K45>


0% [r&w sel]
No action
8 Amplifier check
1 Set vortex frequency[r&w] <K28>
2 End
9 Menu type number
10 Menu type
[[r] : read
[cr] : continuous read
[w] : write
[sel] : select
[#] : method
{} : Only for
Option code /MV
to be continued to next page to be continued to next page <> : Parameter No.
in display and BRAIN
communicator

F040608_4.EPS

4-23 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

4 Signal processing 6 Adjust 1 User adjust[r&w] <H20>


2 Reynolds adjust[#] <H25> Not active[r&w sel]
Active 1 Process density[r&w] <H26>
2 Viscosity[r&w] <H27>
4 Detailed setup 3 End
3 Gas expansion fact <H30>
Not active [r&w sel]
Active
4 Flow adjust[#] <H40>
Not active [r&w sel]
Active 1 Set point 1-data[r&w] <H41, H42>
2 Set point 2-data[r&w] <H43, H44>
3 Set point 3-data[r&w] <H45, H46>
4 Set point 4-data[r&w] <H47, H48>
5 Set point 5-data[r&w] <H49, H50>
6 End

5 Device information
1 Manufacturer[r]
2 Tag[r&w]
3 Descriptor[r&w]
4 Message[r&w]
5 Date[r&w]
6 Write protect[r]
7 Revision numbers 1 Universal rev[r]
2 Fld dev rev[r]
3 Software rev[r]
4 Hardware rev[r]
5 Final assembly num[r]
6 Dev id[r]

Online Menu {6 Thermometer}


1 Device setup 1 Function[#] <F10> Monitor only
2 PV [cr] Saturated steam 1 Mass unit <F12> (*3)
3 AO1 [cr] 2 Time unit <F35> (*1)
4 Flow Span [cr] 3 End
5 Mode
Superheat steam
1 Pressure unit <F14> (*7)
2 Process pressure[r&w] <F15>
3 Mass unit <F16> (*3)
4 Time unit <F35> (*1)
5 End

Gas:STD/Normal
1 Temp unit <F18> (*5)
2 Base temp [r&w] <F19>
3 Pressure unit <F20> (*7)
4 Process pressure[r&w] <F21>
5 Base pressure[r&w] <F22>
6 Devition[r&w] <F23>
7 STD/Normal unit <F24> (*4)
8 Time unit <F35> (*1)
9 End

Liquid:Mass
1 Density unit <F26> (*6)
2 Base density[r&w] <F27>
3 Temp unit <F28> (*5)
4 Base temp[r&w] <F29>
5 1'st temp coeff[r&w] <F30>
6 2'nd temp coeff[r&w] <F31>
7 Mass unit <F32> (*6)
8 Time unit <F35> (*1)
9 End
Not use

2 Cable length[r&w] <F52>


3 Temp damping[r&w] <F50>
4 Analog out select <F55>
Flow
5 Review Temp 1 Temp unit <D20> (*5)
2 Temp 0%[r&w] <F56>
3 Temp 100%[r&w] <F57>
Review 1[r] 4 Temp error out[r&w] <F58> 0% [r&w sel]
Review 2[r] 5 End Out limit(H)
Review 3[r] Process temp
{Review 4}[r]
[[r] : read
[cr] : continuous read
[w] : write
[sel] : select
[#] : method
{} : Only for
Option code /MV
<> : Parameter No.
in display and BRAIN
communicator
F040608_5.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-24
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

Review 1 Review 2 Review 3 Review 4

Model Flow rate unit Special unit Function


Manufacturer Flow span User’s unit Base density
Distributor PV Damp Conversion faetor 1st temp coeff
Tag Contact output Nominal size 2nd temp coeff
Descriptor Pulse a
r te Body type Cable length
Message Frequency at 100% Sensor type Temp damping
Date Setting level K-a
f ctor Analog out select
Dev id Upper display Detector No. Temp 0%
Write protect Lower display User adjust Temp 100%
AO alrm typ Total rate Reynolds adjust Temp error out
Universal rev Total start/stop Viscosity (Only for /MV)
Fld dev rev Fluid Gas expansion a
f ct
Software rev Process density Flow adjust
Hardware rev Process temp TLA
Poll addr Base temp Signal level
Burst mode Process pressure Noise balance mode
Burst option Base pressure Noise ratio
Numb req preams Deviation Span velocity
Low cut Span frequency
Out limit (H)
Burn out

(*8) Status 1 (*9) Status 2 (*10) Status 3

Flow over output Transient noise Temp over output


Span set error High vibration Over temp
Pulse set error Clogging Temp sensor ault
f
Device ID nat entered Fluctuating Temp conv fault
Sensor ault
f (Only for /MV)
Pre-amp af ult
EEPR
OM fault

F040608_6.EPS

4-25 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
4. BASIC OPERATING PROCEDURES

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 4-26
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

5. Parameter Setup

5.1 Parameter Setup 5.3 Parameters List


The parameters are set before factory shipment. Set the This section describes the parameter of digitalYEWFLO.
required parameter of changing fluid, contact out and
• Contents of parameter lists.
indication of display.
Item Description

5.2 Multi-Variable Type Parameter Parameter


number
Parameter item number.

(Only for /MV) Name Parameter name.


R/ W Indicates parameter attributes.
Parameter item F is indicated when /MV is selected.
(Read R: Display only (writing is not permitted).
The parameters are set before factory shipment, but it is and write) W : Writing is permitted.

necessary to set the analog output of temperature, span of Data range Shows data setting ranges for numerical value
entry.
temperature output. Shows data to be selected for data selection.
( ) in parentheses, data code is shown for the
display.
Unit Engineering unit.
IMPORTANT
Remarks Remarks such as a description of the contents
are given.
For the remote type, be sure to set the cable length
Disp. D : Display can set parameter.
(F52) for DYA, remote type converter, because of
U/ D L : Parameter can be set by UP LOAD and
effect of the cable length. DOWN LOAD.
(Check all parameters after setting by DOWN
LOAD.)
Initial value Indicates the initial set values.
T050301.EPS

5-1 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(1) Item A : Indication


These items are for the indication of flowrate and total.

Initial
Item Name R/W Data Range Unit Remark Disp. U / D
value
A00 DISPLAY Menu A (Display)
A10 FLOW RATE(%) R 0.0 to 110.0 % Flow rate
A20 FLOW RATE R 0.0 to 65535 FU+ C40 Flow rate (in engineering unit)
A30 TOTAL R 0 to 999999 FU Totalized value
(Indicate only within Temperature sensor)
A40 TEMP(%)(*1) R 0.0 to 110.0 % Temperature Values (%)
(Indicate only for Temperature sensor)
A41 TEMPERATURE(*1) R –999.9 to 999.9 D20 Temperature Values
A60 SELF CHECK R GOOD Self-diagnostic message
ERROR
FU : Flow unit T050302.EPS
(*1): Only for Option Code /MV

(2) Item B : Easy Setting


These items are for the principal items to operate digitalYEWFLO.
A value in “( )” is the data corresponding to the indicator.
Initial
Item Name R/W Data Range Unit Remark Disp. U / D
value
B00 EASY SETUP Menu B
B10 FLOW SPAN W 0.00001 to 32000 FU + C40 Flow Span 10 D L
B15 DAMPING W 0 to 99 sec Damping Time 4 D L
B20 CONTACT OUT W OFF (0) Contact Output Type (0) D L
SCALED PULSE (1)
UNSCALED PULSE (2)
FREQUENCY (3)
ALARM (4)
FLOW SW(LOW:ON) (5)
FLOW SW(LOW:OFF)(6)
(Indicate and Set only for B20 : SCALED PULSE, UNSCALED PULSE)
B21 PULSE RATE W 0.00001 to 32000 FU / P Pulse Output Rate 1.0 D L
(Indicate and Set only for B20 :FREQUENCY)
B22 FREQ AT 100% W 0 to 10000 PPS Pulse Output Rate at sec / 100% 1000 D L
(Indicate and Set only for B20 :FLOW SW (ON), FLOW SW (OFF))
B23 SET LEVEL W 0.00001 to 32000 FU +C40 Flow Switch (Actual Flow rate) 0 D L
B30 UPPER DISP W FLOW RATE (%) (0) Selection of Upper Display (0) D L
FLOW RATE (1)
TEMP(%)(*1)
B31 LOWER DISP W BLANK (0) Selection of Lower Display (0) D L
TOTAL (1)
TEMP(*1)
B40 TOTAL START W STOP (0) Start / Stop of Totalizer (0) D L
START (1)
FU / P
B45 TOTAL RATE W 0.00001 to 32000 (0) Total Rate 1.0 D L
B47 TOTAL RESET W NOT EXECUTE (0) Totalizer Reset (0) D L
EXECUTE (1)
(Indicate and Set only for Option code /MV)
B50 A / OUT SELECT W FLOW (0) Selection of Analog Output 0 D L
TEMP (1)
(Indicate and Set only for B50: TEMP)
B51 TEMP 0% W -999.9 to 999.9 D20 Set Temperature Value at 0% -40 D L
B52 TEMP 100% W -999.9 to 999.9 D20 Set Temperature Value at 100% 260 D L
B60 SELF CHECK R GOOD Self-diagnostic message
ERROR
FU : Flow unit
T050303.EPS
(*1) : Only for Option Code /MV

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 5-2
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(3) Item C : BASIC SETUP


These items are for the basic parameters with setting before shipment.
The parameters, C20 to C50, are not indicated when option code “/MV” is selected and parameter item is selected in F10 except
“Monitor only” or “Not use”.
A value in“( )” is the data corresponding to the indicator.
Initial
Item Name R/W Data Range Unit Remark Disp. U / D
value
C00 BASIC SETUP Menu C (Meter characterize)
C10 TAG NO. W 16 characters Tag Number
C20 FLUID W LIQUID:Volume (0) Selection of FLUID type (0) D L
GAS/STEAM:Volume (1)
LIQUID:Mass (2)
GAS/STEAM:Mass (3)
GAS:STD/Normal (4)
(Indicate and Set only for C20 : LIQUID : Volume, GAS / STEAM : Volume)
C22 VOLUME UNIT W m3 (0) Selection of Flow Units for Flow Rate (0) D L
k m3 (1)
l (2)
cf (3)
m cf (4)
k cf (5)
USgal (6)
k USgal (7)
UKgal (8)
k UKgal (9)
bbl (10)
m bbl (11)
k bbl (12)
(Indicate and Set only for C20 : LIQUID : MASS, GAS / STEAM : MASS)
C25 DENSITY UNIT W kg/m 3 (0) Selection of Density Unit (0) D L
lb/c f (1)
lb/USgal (2)
lb/UKgal (3) C25
C26 DENSITY f W 0.00001 to 32000 Operating Density (Manual Setting Value) 1024 D L
C27 MASS UNIT W kg (0) Selection of Mass Flow Unit (0) D L
t (1)
lb (2)
k lb (3)
(Indicate and Set only for C20 : GAS : STD / Normal)
C30 TEMP UNIT W deg C (0) Selection of Temperature Unit (0) D L
deg F (1) C30
C31 TEMP f W -999.9 to 999.9 Operating Temperature 15.0 D L
C30 (Manual Setting Value)
C32 TEMP b W -999.9 to 999.9 Standard / Normal Temperature 15.0 D L
C33 PRESS UNIT W MPa abs (0) Selection of Pressure Unit (0) D L
kPa abs (1)
bar abs (2)
kg/cm2 a (3)
psia (4) C33
C34 PRESS f W 0.00001 to 32000 Absolute Pressure at Operating Condition 0.1013 D L
C33 (Manual Setting Value)
C35 PRESS b W 0.00001 to 32000 Absolute Pressure at Standard Condition 0.1013 D L
C36 DEVIATION W 0.001 to 10.0 Deviation Factor 1.0 D L
C37 STD/NOR UNIT W Nm3 (0) Selection of Volumetric Unit at Normal (0) D L
k Nm3 (1) Condition
M Nm3 (2)
Nl (3)
Sm3 (4)
k Sm3 (5)
M Sm3 (6)
Sl (7)
scf (8)
k scf (9)
M scf (10)
C40 TIME UNIT W /s (0) Selection of Time Unit (2) D L
/m (1)
/h (2)
/d (3)
C45 FLOW SPAN W 0.00001 to 32000 FU+C40 Flow Span 10 D L
C50 DAMPING W 0 to 99 sec Damping Time 4 D L
C60 SELF CHECK R GOOD Self-diagnostic message
ERROR
FU : Flow unit T050304.EPS
(*1) : Only for Option Code /MV

5-3 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(4) Item D : Additional Setup


These items are for Auxiliary Setup.
A value in “( )” is the data corresponding to the indicator.
Initial
Item Name R/W Data Range Unit Remark Disp. U / D
value
D00 AUX. SETUP Menu D (Additinal Setup)
D10 LOW CUT W ∗ to 32000 FU + C40 Low Cut Flow rate ∗Minimum Flow rate / 2 D
D20 TEMP UNIT W deg C (0) Selection of Temperature Unit (0) D L
deg F (1)
D21 TEMP f W -999.9 to 999.9 D20 Operating Temperature (Manual Setting Value) 15.0 D L
D25 DENSITY UNIT W kg/m3 (0) Selection of Density Unit (0) D L
lb/cf (1)
lb/USgal (2)
lb/UKgal (3)
D26 DENSITY f W 0.00001 to 32000 D25 Operating Density (Manual Setting Value) 1024 D L
D30 OUT LIMIT (H) W 100.0 to 110.0 % Upper Limit Value 110.0 D L
D35 BURN OUT R High (0) Output Direction at Burn Out (0) D L
Low (1)
D40 SPECIAL UNIT No (0) Selection of change for Special Flow Unit (0) D L
Yes (1)
(Indication and set only for D40 : Yes)
D41 BASE UNIT R m3 (0) Basic unit for conversion to special unit D
k m3 (1)
l (2)
cf (3)
m cf (4)
k cf (5)
USgal (6)
kUSgal (7)
UKgal (8)
kUKgal (9)
bbl (10)
m bbl (11)
k bbl (12)
kg (13)
t (14)
lb (15)
k lb (16)
Nm3 (17)
k Nm3 (18)
M Nm3 (19)
NI (20)
Sm3 (21)
k Sm3 (22)
M Sm3 (23)
SI (24)
scf (25)
k scf (26)
M scf (27)
D42 USER’S UNIT W 8 characters User’s unit L
D43 CONV FACTOR W 0.00001 to 32000 Coefficient for conversion to special unit 1.0 D
D60 SELF CHECK R GOOD Self-diagnostic message L
ERROR
FU : Flow unit T050305.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 5-4
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(5) Item E : Detector Setup


These items are for detector that has been already set before.
A value in“( )” is the da
ta corresponding to the indicator.
Initial
Item Name R/ W Data Range Unit Remark Disp. U / D
value
E00 METER SETUP Menu E (Detector setup)
E10 NOMINAL SIZE W 15mm (0) Selection of Nominal Size (1) D L
25mm (1)
40mm (2)
50mm (3)
80mm (4)
100mm (5)
150mm (6)
200mm (7)
250mm (8)
300mm (9)
-------- (10)
E20 BODY TYPE W Standard (0) Selection of Body Type (0) D L
High Pressure (1)
Low Flow Unit (1) (2)
Low Flow Unit (2) (3)
Reduced Bore Type (/R1)(4)
Reduced Bore Type (/R2)(5)
E30 SENSOR TYPE W Standard (0) Selection of Sensor Type (0) D L
High Temperature (1)
Low Temperature (2)
E40 K-FACT UNIT W P/l (0) Selection of K-factor Unit (0) D L
P/Usgal (1)
P/Ukgal (2) E40
E41 K-FACTOR W 0.00001 to 32000 K-factor value of 15 deg C 68.6 D
E50 DETECTOR No. W 16 characters Detector number
E60 SELF CHECK R GOOD Self-diagnostic message
ERROR
FU : F
low unit T050306.EPS

5-5 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(6) Item F: Thermometer (Only for Option Code /MV)


These items is for thermometer setting when.
A Value in “( )” is the data corresponding to the indicator.
F00 THERMOMETER Menu F(Thermometer) Only within Thermometer Initial Value Disp U/D*1
F10 Function W Monitor only (0) Select thermometer function. (0) D L
Saturated Steam (1) (Move to F40 when “Monitor only” is selected)
Superheat Steam (2) (Move to F60 when “Not Use” is selected)
GAS: STD/Normal (3)
LIQUID: Mass (4)
Not use (5)
(Indicate and set only for F10: Saturated Stem)
F12 MASS UNIT W kg (0) Selection of mass flow rate unit (0) D L
t (1)
Ib (2)
k Ib (3)
(Indicate and set only for F10: Superheat Steam)
F14 PRSS UNIT W MPa abs (0) Selection of pressure unit (0) D L
kPa abs (1)
bar abs (2)
kg/cm2 a (3)
psia (4)
F15 PRESS f W 0.00001 to 32000 F14 Absolute pressure at operating condition(Manual setting vaiue) 0.1013
F16 MASS UNIT W kg (0) Selection of mass flow rate unit (0) D L
t (1)
Ib (2)
k Ib (3)
(Indicate and set only for F10: GAS STD/Normal)
F18 TEMP UNIT W deg C (0) Selection of temperature unit (0) D L
deg F (1)
F19 TEMP b W -999.9 to 999.9 F18 Standard/Normal temperature 15.0 D L
F20 PRESS UNIT W MPa abs (0) Selection of temperture unit (0) D L
W kPa abs (1)
W bar abs (2)
W kg/cm2 a (3)
W psia (4)
F21 PRESS f W 0.00001 to 32000 F20 Absolute pressure at operating condition(Manual setting value) 0.1013 D L
F22 PRESS b W 0.00001 to 32000 F20 Absolute pressure at Standard condition 0.1013 D L
F23 DEVIATION W 0.001 to 10.000 Deviation factor 1.0 D L
F24 STD/NOR UNIT W Nm3 (0) Selection of volumetric unit at normal condition (0) D L
k Nm3 (1)
M Nm3 (2)
NI (3)
Sm3 (4)
k Sm3 (5)
M Sm3 (6)
SI (7)
scf (8)
k scf (9)
M scf (10)
(Indicate and set only for F10: Liquid: Mass)
F26 DENSITY UNIT W kg/m3 (0) Selection of density unit 0 D L
Ib/cf (1)
Ib/USgal (2)
Ib/UKgal (3)
F27 DENSITY b W 0.00001 to 32000 F26 Density of standard condition 1024 D L
F28 TEMP UNIT W deg C (0) Selection of temperature unit 0 D L
deg F (1)
F29 TEMP b W -999.9 to 999.9 F28 Temperature of standard condition 15.0 D L
F30 1st coef W -32000 to 32000 1/F28 1st temperature coefficient 0 D L
F31 2nd coef W -32000 to 32000 1/F28ˆ2 2nd temperature coefficient 0 D L
F32 MASS UNIT W kg (0) Selection of mass flow rate unit (0) D L
t (1)
Ib (2)
k Ib (3)
F35 TIME UNIT W /s (0) Selection of time unit 1 D L
/m (1)
/h (2)
/d (3)
F40 FLOW SPAN W 0.00001 to 32000 FU+35 Flow span 0.5 D L
F45 DAMPING W 0 to 99 sec Damping 4 D L
F50 TEMP DAMPING W 0 to 99 sec Damping for temperture output 4 D L
F52 CABLE LENGTH W 0 to 30 m Cable length for signal cable (0m in case of integral version) 0 D L
F55 A/OUT SELECT W FLOW (0) Selection of analog output 0 D L
TEMP (1)
(Indicate and set only for F55: TEMP)
F56 TEMP 0% W -999.9 to 999.9 D20 Temperture value at 0% -40 D L
F57 TEMP 100% W -999.9 to 999.9 D20 Temperture value at 100% 260 D L
F58 TEMP ERR OUT W 0% (0) Selection of themometer error output when “F55: TEMP” 1 D L
OUT LIMIT(H) (1) is selected (A value of OUT LIMIT(H) depend on D30)
TEMP f (2)
F60 SELF CHECK R GOOD Self-diagnostic message
ERROR
(*1) When “K50 : SOFTWARE REV” is “3.10”, it can be available. T050307.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 5-6
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(7) Item H : Adjust.


These items are for setting of adjustment.
A value in “( )” is the data corresponding to the indicator.
Initial
Item Name R/W Data Range Unit Remark Disp. U / D
value
H00 ADJUST Menu H (Adjust)
H10 TRIM 4mA W -1.00 to 1.00 % Trimming 4mA 0.0 D
H11 TRIM 20mA W -1.00 to 1.00 % Trimming 20mA 0.0 D
H20 USER ADJUST W 0.00001 to 32000 User Adjust 1.0 D
H25 REYNOLDS ADJ W NOT ACTIVE (0) Reynolds Coefficient (0) D
ACTIVE (1)
(Indicator and Set only H25 : Active)
H26 DENSITY f W 0.00001 to 32000 D25 Density at operating condition 1024 D
H27 VISCOSITY W 0.00001 to 32000 mPa.s Viscosity factor 1.0 D
H30 EXPANSION FA W NOT ACTIVE (0) Expansion correction for compressible Gas (0) D
ACTIVE (1)
H40 FLOW ADJUST W NOT ACTIVE (0) Instrumental Error Adjust (0) D
ACTIVE (1)
(Indicator and Set only H40 : Active)
H41 FREQUENCY 1 W 0 to 32000 Hz First break-point frequency (f1) 0.0 D
H42 DATA 1 W -50.00 to 50.00 % First correcting value (d1) 0.0 D
H43 FREQUENCY 2 W 0 to 32000 Hz Second break-point frequency (f2) 0.0 D
H44 DATA 2 W -50.00 to 50.00 % Second correcting value (d2) 0.0 D
H45 FREQUENCY 3 W 0 to 32000 Hz Third break-point frequency (f3) 0.0 D
H46 DATA 3 W -50.00 to 50.00 % Third correcting value (d3) 0.0 D
H47 FREQUENCY 4 W 0 to 32000 Hz Fourth break-point frequency (f4) 0.0 D
H48 DATA 4 W -50.00 to 50.00 % Fourth correcting value (d4) 0.0 D
H49 FREQUENCY 5 W 0 to 32000 Hz Fifth break-point frequency (f5) 0.0 D
H50 DATA 5 W -50.00 to 50.00 % Fifth correcting value (d5) 0.0 D
H60 SELF CHECK R GOOD Self-diagnostic message
ERROR
T050308.EPS

(8) Item J : Test


These items are for test of output.
A value in “( )” is the data corresponding to the indicator.
Initial
Item Name R/W Data Range Unit Remark Disp. U / D
value
J00 TEST Menu J (Test)
J10 OUT ANALOG W 0.0 to 110.0 % Current Output 0.0 D
J20 OUT PULSE W 0 to 10000 PPS Pulse Output 0 D
J30 OUT STATUS W OFF (0) Status Output (0) D
ON (1)
J60 SELF CHECK R GOOD Self-diagnostic message
ERROR
T050309.EPS

5-7 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(9) Item K : Maintenance


These items are for maintenance.

Initial
Item Name R/W Data Range Unit Remark Disp. U / D
value
K00 MAINTENANCE Menu K (Maintenance)
K10 TLA W 0.1 to 20.0 Trigger Level Adjust 1.0 D
K20 SIGNAL LEVEL W 0.1 to 20.0 Signal Level 1.0 D
K25 N.B. MODE W AUTO (0) Selection of Noise balance Mode (0) D
MANUAL (1)
TUNING AT ZERO (2)

K26 NOISE RATIO R / W 0.00 to 2.00 D


K28 SET VORTEX F W 0 to 10000 Hz Output test by setting simulated frequency.
(*2) D
K30 VELOCITY R m/s Velocity D
K32 SPAN V R m/s Span velocity D
K34 VORTEX FREQ. R Hz Vortex frequency D
K36 SPAN F R Hz Span frequency D
(Indicate only for F10:“Saturated Steam
” or “Super heat steam
” or “Liquid mass)(*1)
K38 DENSITY R 0.00001 to 32000 D25 Density value (Calculated by Thermometer) D
K40 ERROR RECORD R Error Records
0%
K45 H VIBRATION W No ACTION Selection of Output Function when“High
Vibration” error is indicated.
K50 SOFTWARE REV R 0.01 to 99.99 Software Revision Number
K60 SELF CHECK R GOOD Self-diagnostic message
ERROR
T050310.EPS
(*1) Only for Option Code /MV
(*2) Available for 5.10 or greater version that can be checked in K50 SOFTWARE
EV. R

(10) Item M : Memo


These items are for Memorandum.

Initial
Item Name R/W Data Range Unit Remark Disp. U / D
value
M00 MEMO Menu M (Memo)
M10 MEMO 1 W 16 characters Memorandum 1 (16 characters)
M20 MEMO 2 W 16 characters Memorandum 2 (16 characters)
M30 MEMO 3 W 16 characters Memorandum 3 (16 characters)
M60 SELF CHECK R GOOD Self-diagnostic message
ERROR
T050311.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 5-8
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

5.4 Parameter Description (2) Item B : Easy Setting


These items are for the Principal items to operate
(1) Item A : Display digitalYEWFLO.
These items are for the indication of flowrate and total.
A value in “( )” is the data corresponding to indicator.
[A10:FLOW RATE(%)] Flow rate
[B10:FLOW SPAN] Flowrate span
Flowrate is displayed by “%” to span value.
Set the required span with a numerical.
[A20:FLOW RATE] Flow rate (Engineering unit)
Flowrate is displayed by engineering unit. [B15:DAMPING] Damping time constant
Set damping time constant values from 0s to 99sec.
[A30:TOTAL] Total value
Total value of flowrate is displayed
[B20:CONTACT OUT] Contact output
The following item should be done in case of Select contact output.
which Option code /MV is selected and Item Description
analog output is “Temperature”.
OFF (0)
[A40:TEMP(%)] Temperature value SCALED PULSE (1) Scaled pulse output: Refer to
“B21”
The measured temperature value is displayed by “%” to span UNSCALED PULSE (2) Unscaled pulse output: Refer to
“B21”
value of temperature. FREQUENCY (3) Frequency output: Refer to“B22”
ALARM (4) Alarm output: The status goes from close
The following item should be done in case of to open (OFF) during alarming.
which Option code /MV is selected. Refer to 5.5 Error Code Lists.
[A41:TEMPERATURE] Temperature value FLOW SW(LOW:ON)(5) Status output: Refer to“B23”

The measured temperature value is displayed by engineering FLOW SW(LOW:OFF)(6) Status output: Refer to“B23”
T050401.EPS
unit.
[B21:PULSE RATE] Pulse output rate
Set output rate in a selection of SCALED PULSE or
UNSCALED PULSE.

SCALED PULSE OUTPUT:

When SCALED PULSE is selected in B20, set flowrate per


one pulse output. Rate unit is linking to the flow unit.

UNSCALED PULSE OUTPUT:

When UNSCALED PULSE is selected in B20, it output


number of vortex (vortex frequency) as a pulse-number,
which is detected from vortex shedder bar. (1.0 must be set
for this.)

The formula for output pulse number is as follows.

Output pulse number per one second = vortex number per


one second / PULSE RATE set number. Refer to 6.1.5 Unit
of Pulse Output (Scaling).

5-9 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

[B22:100% FREQ] Pulse numbers of 100% at one [B47:TOTAL RESET] Reset the totalizer
second When totalizer reset function is executed, the total display
Set pulse number at 100% for one second when “FRE- and communication parameter are reset.
QUENCY” in B20 is selected.
The following items should be done in case of
Pulse numbers (PPS) which Option code “/MV” is selected.
[B50 A/OUT SELECT] Analog Output select
Select the analog output select from flow rate or temperature.

When changing the analog output, UPPER DISPLAY can be


T=1s changed shown as below automatically.
F050401.EPS
B50 : A/OUT SELECT UPPER DISPLAY
“TEMP” TO “FLOW” FLOW(%)
[B23:SET LEVEL] Level of flow switch “FLOW” TO “TEMP” TEMP(%)
(“B30 : UPPER DISPLAY” is “FLOW RATE”, it can not be changed.)
Set level of flow switch when “FLOW SW” in B20 is T050402.EPS
selected. The contact output is sent out when the flowrate is
The following item should be done in case of
less than the set comparison level.
which B50 is “TEMP”
[B51 TEMP 0%]
Set temperature value of 0% output.

Output [B52 TEMP 100%]


(%) Setting Value
Set temperature valve of 100% output.

10% Hysteresis

Contact Output ON : FLOW SW (LOW : ON)


Contact Output OFF : FLOW SW (LOW : OFF)
F050402.EPS

[B30:UPPER DISP] Upper indicator display


Select upper display, Flow rate (%) (0), Flowrate (1),
TEMP(%)(2). “TEMP(%)” can be selected when Option
Code
/MV.

[B31:LOWER DISP] Lower indicator display


Select lower indicator display, “BLANK (0), TOTAL (1),
TEMP(2). When “BLANK” in B31 is selected, indicator is
blank. “TEMP” can be selected when Option Code
/MV.

[B40:TOTAL START]
Select the START/STOP of totalizer from “STOP (0),
START (1).”

[B45:TOTAL RATE] Total rate of the totalizer


Set the total rate of the totalizer.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 5-10
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(3) Item C : BASIC SETUP The following item should be done in case of
These items are for the basic parameters with setting before which “C20” is “GAS/STEAM : Volume”.
shipment. [C30:TEMP UNIT] Fluid temperature unit at
The parameters which are set in B are not necessary to set in C.
operating conditions
Select temperature unit at operating condition from
A value in “( )” is the data corresponding to indicator.
“degC (0), degF (1)”.
The parameters, C20 to C50, are not indicated
when option code “/MV” is selected and [C31:TEMP f] Fluid temperature at operating
parameter item is selected in F10 except conditions
“Monitor only” or “Not Use”. Set fluid temperature at operating condition.
[C10: TAG NO] Tag. No Range is -196 to 450°C
Set Tag. No. (16 characters)

Available characters are as follows. The following items should be done in case of
which “C20” is “GAS/STD : Normal”.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZa
[C32:TEMP b] Fluid temperature at standard/
bcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz01234567 normal conditions
8 9 . SPACE / - , + * ) ( & % $ # “ !
’ Set the values of Fluid temperature at standard condition.

[C33:PRESS UNIT] Pressure unit


[C20:FLUID] Flowrate unit
Select the unit of pressure from “MPa abs(0), kPa abs(1), kg/
Set the flowrate unit below.
cm2 abs(2), bar abs(3)”.
Item Description
LIQUID : Volume (0) Volumetric flow of Iiquid measuring
[C34:PRESS f] Absolute pressure at operating
conditions
GAS/STEAM : Volume (1) Volumetric flow of gas or steam measuring
Set the absolute pressure at operating condition.
LIQUID : Mass (2) Mass flow of liquid measuring
GAS/STEAM : Mass (3) Mass flow of gas or steam measuring [C35:PRESS b] Absolute pressure at standard/
GAS : STD/Normal (4) Volumetric flow at Standard condition normal condition
T050403.EPS
Set the absolute pressure at normal condition.
The following items should be done in case of
which “C20” is “LIQUID : Volume” or “GAS/ [C36:DEVIATION] Deviation factor
STEAM : Volume”. Set deviation factor.

[C22:VOLUME UNIT] Volumetric unit [C37:STD/NOR UNIT] Volumetric unit at normal


Select the unit of volumetric flow from m3(0), km3(1), l(2), conditions
cf(3), mcf(4), def(5), USgal(6), kUKgal(9), bbl(10), Select volumetric unit at normal condition from Nm3(0),
mbbl(11), kbbl(12). kNm3(1), MNm3(2), Nl(3), Sm3(4), Km3(5), Mm3(6), Sl(7),
scf(8), kscf(9), Mscf(10).
The following items should be done in case of
which “C20” is “LIQUID: Mass” or “GAS/
STEAM : Mass”
[C25:DENSITY UNIT] Density Unit of Flow
[C40:TIME UNIT] TIME UNIT
measurement
Select time unit from “/s(0), /m(1), /h(2), d(3)”
Select the unit of density from kg/m3(0), lb(1), lb/USgal(2),
lb/UKgal(3).
[C45:FLOW SPAN] Flowrate span
[C26:DENSITY f] Density at normal operation Set the required span with a numerical value.
conditions
[C50:DAMPING] Damping time constant
Set the density value of the fluid at operating condition for
mass flow unit. Set damping time constant values from 0 to 99sec.

[C27:MASS UNIT] Mass flowrate unit


Select the mass flowrate unit from kg(0), t(1), lb(2), k lb(3).

5-11 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(4) Item D (AUX SETUP) Select the availability of changing to special flowrate Unit
These items are for Auxiliary setup. from “No(0)” or “Yes(1)”

A value in “( )” is the data corresponding to indicator.


[D41:BASE UNIT] Indication of the special
flowrate unit
[D10:LOW CUT] Low-cut flowrate
Indication of the basic flowrate unit when item D40 is
“Yes(1)”

NOTE [D42:USER'S UNIT] Free unit for users


For D10 setting, be sure to set “NOMINAL SIZE” Set in up to 8 alphanumeric characters when item D40 is
in E10 firstly. “Yes(1)”

Set to noise elimination or zero flow in the low flowrate (or


low frequency) range. The settable range for low cut flowrate
is more than half-minimum flowrate.

NOTE

D10: LOW CUT can be set after the items for


compensations (H25, H30, H40) are set to
“ACTIVE”.

[D20:TEMP UNIT] Fluid temperature unit at


operating conditions
Select temperature unit at operating condition from
“degC (0), degF (1)”.

[D21:TEMP f] Fluid temperature at operating


conditions
Set fluid temperature at operating condition.

Range is -196 to 450°C

[D25:DENSITY UNIT] Density Unit of Flow


measurement
Select the unit of density from kg/m3(0), lb(1), lb/USgal(2),
lb/UKgal(3).

[D26:DENSITY f] Density at normal operation


conditions
Set the density value of the fluid at operating condition for
mass flow unit

[D30:OUT LIMIT] Limit value of output and


indication
Set limit value of output from 100.0% to 110.0%

[D35:BURN OUT] Indication of the output


direction at burn out
This is indication of the output direction at burn out. Refer to
“6.1.6 Burn out” when the output direction can be changed.

[D40:SPECIAL UNIT] Change to special


flowrate unit

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 5-12
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(5) Item E (METER SETUP) (6) ltem F (Thermometer)


These items are for detector set up that has already been set These items are for setting of thermometer and available
before shipment. when build in thermometer type (Option code: /MV).

A value in “( )” is the data corresponding to indicator.


[F10: Function] Thermometer function
[E10:NOMINAL SIZE] Nominal size of the Select the thermometer function.
detector Monitor only(0): Only temperature measurement.
Select the nominal size of the flowmeter, from “15mm(0),
Saturated Steam: Mass Flow rate is calculated from density
25mm(1), 40mm(2), 50mm(3), 80mm(4), 100mm(5),
values by temperature measurement
150mm(6), 200mm(7), 250mm(8), 300mm(9)”
using saturated steam table.
[E20:BODY TYPE] Body type for the detector Superheat Steam: Mass Flow rate is calculated from density
Select body type for detector from standard or high pressure. values by temperature measured by using
Standard (0) : Standard type steam table. In order to measure
High Pressure (1) : High Pressure type (tokuchu) superheat steam. It is necessary to make
Low Flow Unit (1) (2) : Reduced Bore type (option : /R1) constant pressure value.
Low Flow Unit (2) (3) : Reduced Bore type (option : /R2)
GAS: STD/Normal: Volumetric flow rate at standard
condition is calculated by using Pressure-
NOTE Temperature correction. It is necessary to
male constant pressure value.
Parameter setting for the Reduced Bore type,
Liquid: Mass: Mass flow rate is calculated by using the
Select Low Flow Unit (1) or (2) and set. Set
density change values depend on
nominal size of the model code to E10:
temperature values by which the
NOMINAL SIZE. secondary order function is used.

The following item should be done in case of


[E30:SENSOR TYPE] Sensor type for the which F10 is Saturated steam
detector
Select sensor type for the detector from standard or HT/LT [F12 MASS UNlT] Mass flow unit
Select mass rate unit from kg(0), t(1), lb(2), k lb(3).
[E40:K-FACTOR UNIT],
Select this unit from p/l, p/Usgal, p/Ukgal. The following items should be done in case of
which F10 is Superheat steam
[E41:K-FACTOR]
The flowmeter data plate includes a K-factor (KM) at 15°C
[F14 PRESS UNIT] Pressure unit
for the combined detector. Select pressure unit from MPa abs(0), kPa abs(1), bar abs(2),
kg/cm2 a(3), psia(4).
[E50:DETECTOR NO.] Detector number of
flowmeter [F15 PRESS f] Pressure value
Set the serial number using 16 alphanumeric characters of the Set absolute pressure values at operating condition.
detector combined converter.
[F16 MASS UNIT] Mass flow unit
Select mass flow unit from kg(0), t(1), lb(2), k lb(3).

The following items should be done in case of which F10 is


GAS: STD/Normal

[F18 TEMP UNIT] Temperature unit


Select temperature unit from deg C(0), deg F (1).

[F19 TEMP b] Temperature b


Set temperature value at normal/standard condition.

5-13 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

[F20 PRESS UNIT] Pressure unit [F50 TEMP DAMPING] Temperature damping
Select pressure unit from MPa abs(0), kPa abs(1), bar abs(2), Set temperature damping, 0 to 99sec.
kg/cm2 a(3), psia(4).
[F52 CABLE LENGTH] Cable length of signal
[F21 PRESS f] Pressure value f cable(DYC)
Set absolute pressure values at operating condition. Set cable length(m) of signal cable for DYA.

When type of model is integral, cable length is set in 0m.


[F22 PRESS b] Pressure value b
Set absolute pressure values at normal/standard Condition.

[F23 DEVIATION] Daviation factor IMPORTANT


Set the daviation factor.
Be sure to set this parameter to correct temperature
measurement error, occured by cable length.
[F24 STD/NOR UNIT] Standard/Normal unit
Select Volumetric unit at standard/normal condition From
Nm3(0), k Nm3(1), M Nm3(2), Nl(3), Sm3(4)
[F55 A/OUT SELECT] Analog out select
k Sm3(5), M Sm3(6), Sl(7), scf(8), k scf(9), M scf(10) Select the analog output from FLOW(0), TEMP(1).

The following item should be done in case of The following item should be done in case of
which F10 is LIQUID:MASS which F55 is TEMP
[F26 DENSITY UNIT] Density unit [F56 TEMP 0%] Temperature at 0%
Select density unit from kg/m3(0), lb/cf(1), lb/Usgal(2), lb/ Set temperature value at 0%.
Ukgal(3).
[F57 TEMP 100%] Temperature at 100%
[F27 DENSlTY b] Density b Set temperature value at 100%.
Set density value at standard condition.
[F58 TEMP ERR OUT] Output selection of
[F28 TEMP UNIT] Temperature unit thermometer error
Select temperature unit from deg C(0), deg F(1). Select output function when thermometer error from 0%(0),
OUTLIMIT(H)(1), TEMP f.
[F29 TEMP b] Temperature b
In case of OUT LIMIT(H), it is based on parameter “D30”
Set temperature value at standard condition

[F30 1st coef] lst coefficient


Set lst temperature coefficient using the density correction.

[F31 2nd coef] 2nd coefficient


Set lst temperature coefficient using the density correction.

[F32 MASS UNIT] Mass unit


Select mass flow rate unit from kg(0), t(1), lb(2), k lb(3).

[F35 TIME UNIT] Time unit


Select time unit from /s(0), /m(1), /h(2), /d(3).

[F40 FLOW SPAN] Flow span


Set span flow rate, 0 to 32000.

[F45 DAMPING] Flow damping


Set flow damping, 0 to 99sec.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 5-14
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(7) Item H (ADJUST) [H41, H45:FLOW ADJUST] Instrumental Error


This item for setting of adjustment. Correction
n Correct the instrumental error in flowmeter characteristics
[H10, H11:TRIM 4mA, TRIM 20mA] Triming of using 1 line-segment approximation (with five correction
4mA and 20mA factors).
Fine tuning adjustment of 4mA and 20mA output. (1)Flow frequency input at line segments needs to be
f 1 -f 2 -f 3 -f 4 -f 5 .
Fine tuning range is form -1.00% to 1.00%.
When four correction factors are available, line segments
need to be f4=f5 and d4=d5.
[H20:USER ADJUST] Conversion factor for
user setting. When three correction factors are available, line
segments need to be f3=f4=f5 and d3=d4=d5.
Set conversion factor by user.
(2)When a flow input of f1 or less is present, correct the
This conversion factor is converted into measurement instrumental error as the corrected value=d1.
flowrate. (3)When a flow input of f5 or more is present, correct the
instrumental error as the corrected value=d5.
[H25:REYNOLDS ADJ] Reynolds adjustment (4)Abscissa (f1 to f5) : Set the break-point frequencies as
Select the Reynolds adjustment. parameters.
(5)Ordinate (d1 to d5) : Set the corrected value (%) at each
This adjustment should be done in case of their error
break-point as parameters.
compensation, because error of vortex flowmeter should be
increased when it come to low reynolds numbers. Qs-I
Set value = - ∞ 100
I
The following item should be done in case of
which “H25” is “ACTIVE”. Where
Qs : Correct flowrate determined by a reference apparatus
[H26:DENSITY f] I : Indication of vortex flowmeter
Set the density at operating condition.
• Definition of error varies with the type of flowmeter. Be
[H27:VISCOSITY] careful of the difference in signs in the error and corrected
Set the value of density and viscosity at standard conditions. value.
These values should be used for Reynolds adjustment. f(Hz)
Reynolds number(Re) is calculated as shown in the formula Qf = ∞ 100
K-factor
below.
holds and the error is included in the K-factor.
Q · pf Therefore, for the region where the K-factor shift on the
Re = 354 x positive side, the corrected value is negative.
D· v
The corrected value when the calibration fluid of the
Q : Volumetric flow (m3/h) flowmeter and the fluid to be measured are different must
D : Internal diameter (m) be set as a corrected value obtained by making both
pf : Density at operating condition abscissas agree with respect to the Reynolds number.
µ : Viscosity (m Pa · s (cp))

Flowrate error of vortex flowmeter increases as Reynolds


number decrease less than 20000.
NOTE

By setting H25, H26, H27, it corrects the error. D10: LOW CUT can be set after the items for
compensations (H25, H30, H40) are set to
[H30:EXPANSION FA] Gas expansion correc- “ACTIVE”.
tion.
When measuring a compressibility gas by mass flow (Steam
M, Gas M) and standard condition (Gas Qn), this expansion
factor is useful to correct the deviation from the ideal gas
law.

[H40:FLOW ADJUST] Select a break point


correction
Select a break point correction for the instrumental error from
“NOT ACTIVE(0) OR ACTIVE(1)”.

5-15 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP

(8) Item J (TEST) When N.B. mode is “MANUAL”, the noise balance can be
These items are for test of output. adjusted entering the setting values.

A value in “( )” is the data corresponding to indicator. Note: Refer to “6.2 Adjustment for Manual Mode”.

[J10:OUT ANALOG] 4 to 20mA Current output. [K28:SET VORTEX F] Output test by setting
It tests 4 to 20mA Current output. Electric current of the set simulated frequency.
value (%) which designates 4 to 20mA as 0 to 100%. Amplifier check is executed by simulated frequency input.

When this test is executed, transistor contact output (Pulse, Output to be able to check are, analog output, pulse output/
Alarm, Status) is fixed at ON or OFF (not determined). contact output.

Exiting this parameter item or stopping access after ten Test status also can be seen on display board.
minutes, this function will be reset automatically.

[J20:OUT PULSE] Pulse output NOTE


It tests Pulse output.
• In case of multi-variable type (/MV), output
The number of pulses which is set (unit: PPS) is output.
value is calculated by setting density and
Exiting this parameter item or stopping access after ten temperature.
minutes, this function will be reset automatically. • Available for 5.10 or greater version that can
be checked in K50 SOFTWARE REV.
When this test is executed, current output is fixed at 0%
(4mA).

[J30:OUT STATUS] Status output test [K30:VELOCITY] Flow velocity


Status output test can be executed (OFF(0) or ON(1)). Indication of flow velocity at the operating conditions.

When this test is executed, current output is fixed at 0% [K32:SPAN V] Flow span velocity
(4mA). Indication of flow span velocity.
Exiting this parameter item or stopping access after ten When /MV is selected and “F10 : FUNCTION” is “Saturated
minutes, this function will be reset automatically. Steam” or “Superheat Steam” and “GAS : STD/Normal” or
“LIQUID : Mass”, the display of span velocity may differ
(9) Item K (Maintenance) from an actual value.
These items are for maintenance.

A value in “( )” is the data corresponding to indicator. [K34:VORTEX FREQ.] Vortex frequency.


Indication of vortex frequency at operating conditions.
[K10:TLA] TLA Adjustment
Trigger level (TLA) is adjusted upon shipment. Therefore, [K36:SPAN F] Span vortex frequency.
TLA adjustment is nonnecessity. But set TLA adjustment Indication of span vortex frequency.
below as When /MV is selected and “F10 : FUNCTION” is “Saturated
• The measurement of Low flow rate area is required. Steam” or “Superheat Steam” and “GAS : STD/Normal” or
• Mechanical vibration and impact are applied to “LIQUID : Mass”, the display of span frequency may differ
digitalYEWFLO and Zero point and low flow rate area is from an actual value.
output.
Note: Refer to “6.2 Adjustment for Manual Mode”. [K40:ERROR RECORD] Error record
The error record can be indicated.
[K20:SIGNAL LEVEL] • The error is recorded as history.
Set the signal level. • The error history is not time-series data.
• The error history can be holded for 30 days.
[K25:N. B. MODE] In order to clear an error record, set the video inverse bar by
Set the Noise Balance Mode from “AUTO(0)” or “< >” and press “ENTER”key twice.
“MANUAL(1)” or “TUNING AT ZERO(2)”
[K50:SOFTWARE REV] Software revision
[K26:N. B.RATIO] The ratio of Noise Balance. The software revision can be indicated.
When “NOISE BALANCE MODE (N. B. MODE)” is
“AUTO”, noise balance value is the indication only.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 5-16
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
Diagnostic Error Current Output % Output Pulse Engineering Totalizing Engineering Pulse / Status Output How to
Indication Problem Cause Select Select Select Select
Message Name Output Unit Output Output Temp Output Pulse(*2) Status(*2) Alarm(*2) recover
flow rate temperature flow rate temperature
Err-01 OVER Over range Output signal is Fixed at Normal Fixed at Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal OFF(H) Change

Table 5.1
OUTPUT output 110% or more 110%(*1) Operation 110%(*1) Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation parameters
signal or over ranged
flow input
Err-02 SPAN SET Span Span setting Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal OFF(H) Change
ERROR Setting parameter is more Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation parameters
Error than 1.5 times of span factor
max flow velocity is outside the
acceptable
limits
Err-06 PULSE Pulse Pulse output Normal Normal Normal Normal Fixed at Normal Normal Normal Fixed at Change
OUT output frequency is more Operation Operation Operation Operation 10KHz Operation Operation Operation 10kHz parameters
ERROR error than 10kHz (ItemC,ItemE)
Err-07 PULSE Pulse Pulse output Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Change
ERROR Code List

SET setting frequency setting Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation parameters
ERROR error is more than 10kHz (ItemC,ItemE)
The error contents are listed below:

CHECK Transient Error of Transitional Hold Normal Hold Normal Normal Hold Normal Normal Hold Hold OFF(H)
5.5 Error Code Lists

CHECK the
Vibration noise Vibration disturbance Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation vibration
CHECK High Error of High vibration Based on Normal Based on Normal Stop Based on Stop the Normal Normal Normal OFF(H) CHECK the
Vibration vibration Vibration K45 Operation K45 Operation Output K45 total Operation Operation Operation vibration
CHECK Fluctualing Error of Fluctuating Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal OFF(H) CHECK the
Flow Flow Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation clogging
CHECK Clogging Error of Clogging Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal OFF(H) CHECK the
Flow Flow Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation clogging
Err-10 TEMP Over range Temp output Normal Fixed at Normal Fixed at Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal OFF(H) CHECK the
OVER Temp signal is 110% or Operation 110% in Operation 110% in Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation temperature
OUTPUT output more, and 0% case of case of or temperature
signal below. over 110%, over 110%, span
and fixed at and fixed at
0% when in 0% when in
case of less case of less
than 0%.(*1) than 0%.(*1)
Err-11 OVER Error of Temp value is Remain in Remain in Remain in Remain in Remain in Remain in Remain in Remain in Remain in Remain in OFF(H) CHECK the

5-17
TEMP temperature -50C below or operationat operation at operation at operation at operation at operation at operation at operation at operation at
F2 [DIAG] on BRAIN Terminal and the error contents are displayed.

operationat temperature
300C over. Temp=-50C Temp=-50C Temp=-50C Temp=-50C Temp=-50C Temp=-50C Temp=-50C Temp=-50C Temp=-50C Temp=-50C
or or or or or or or or or or
Temp=300C Temp=300C Temp=300C Temp=300C Temp=300C Temp=300C Temp=300C Temp=300C Temp=300C Temp=300C
Err-12 TEMP Error of Disconnection or Remain in Based on Remain in Based on Remain in Remain in Remain in Based on Remain in Remain in OFF(H) Change
SENSOR thermometer short of operation F58 operation F58 operation at operation operation at F58 operation operation thermometer
FAULT thermometer at Manual at Manual Manual at Manual Manual at Manual at Manual sensor.
sensor setting setting setting setting setting setting setting
condition condition condition condition condition condition condition
Err-13 TEMP Error of Temperature Remain in Based on Remain in Based on Remain in Remain in Remain in Based on Remain in Remain in OFF(H) Change
CONV. temperature converter is failed operation F58 operation F58 operation at operation operation at F58 operation operation converter
FAULT converter at Manual at Manual Manual at Manual Manual at Manual at Manual case build in
setting setting setting setting setting setting setting temperature
condition condition condition condition condition condition condition sensor.
Err-20 PRE-AMP PRE-AMP Normal Remain in Normal Remain in Normal Normal Normal Remain in Normal Normal OFF(H) Replace the
ERROR is failed Operation operation Operation operation Operation Operation Operation operation Operation Operation AMP. unit
at Manual at Manual at Manual
Setting Setting Setting
Temperature Temperature Temperature
Value Value Value
Err-30 EE PROM EEPROM Over Over 110% Fixed at 0% Fixed at 0% Halt Fixed at 0% Halt Fixed at 0% Stop the OFF(H) OFF(H) Replace the
ERROR is not 110% or or -2.5% Output AMP. unit
functioning -2.5% below
correctly below
Err-40 FLOW Error of Flow sensor Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal OFF(H) Change
SEBSOR Flow Is fauit. Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Flow sensor
FAULT sensor
CPU CPU is All operations are Over Over Halt Halt Halt Halt Halt Halt Halt Halt Halt Replace the
FAULT failed Dead. 110% or 110% or AMP. unit
Display and self -2.5% -2.5%
dignostic function below below
is also dead.g
Note. Normal Operation : Operation continues without relation to error occurrence. (*1) “110%” is based on “D30 : OUT LIMIT(H)”. T050501.EPS

Remain in Operation : Calculation continues with relation to error occurrence. (*2) Pulse output : These conditions should be done in case of which B20 is “SCALED PULSE”, “UNSCALED PULSE”, “FREQUENCY”.
Status output : These conditions should be done in case of which B20 is “FLOW SW (LOW :ON)”, “FLOW SW (LOW : OFF)”.
When an ERROR is displayed by SELF CHECK in item A60, B60, C60, D60, E60, or H60, J60, K60, M60, press function key

Alarm output : These conditions should be done in case of which B20 is “Alarm”.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
5. PARAMETER SETUP
5. PARAMETER SETUP

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 5-18
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
6. OPERATION

6. OPERATION

After you have installed the flowmeter into the process 24V DC
+ ±10%
piping, wired the input/output terminals, set up the required 250Ω
parameters, the vortex flowmeter should output an accurate –
flow signal from its terminals as soon as the measured liquid
begins to flow.

This section describes procedure of test method and adjust-


ment method for the pre-operation.

6.1 Adjustment
6.1.1 Zero Adjustment
BT200
No zero adjustment is necessary since the zero point does not F060101.EPS

shift.
Figure 6.1 Connection of Maintenance Instruments
Because of the effect of electrical noise and vibration noise,
digitalYEWFLO may provide an output even when the
flowrate is zero. In that case, properly eliminate the source of IMPORTANT
the noise.
• When using any test-purpose measuring
Refer to “6.2 : Adjustment for manual mode”. instruments, do not ground them.

6.1.2 Span Adjustment • All of your parameter settings will be cancelled


if you turn digitalYEWFLO off less than 30
In normal application, you need not confirm the span. seconds after the parameter setup. Keep
If you need to ensure the output of 4 to 20mA DC, refer to digitalYEWFLO turned on at least 30 seconds
“6.1.3 Loop Test”. after setting up the parameters.

6.1.3 Loop test


To ensure output of 4 to 20mA DC or pulse, their loop tests
6.1.4 Totalizer Function Start and Total-
can be done using parameter “J10 (Analog out)” or “J20
ized Value Reset
(Pulse test)”. When using the Totalizer Function, the start setup should be
done.
If you are verifying the analog output, follow the procedure
on the verification procedure. (1) Start operation using BT200
Enter to B40(TOTAL START), and move the video bar
<Check Procedure>
to “EXECUTE”. Push “ENTER” key at 2 times.
1. Connect the instruments referring to Figure 6.1, and warm (2) Start operation using indicator
up for three minutes more. Enter to “Setting mode”, move to B40 of parameter
2. Set span frequency in Parameter J10:OUT ANALOG. number, and enter to “01” of data number.
3. In case the load resistance is 250 ohm, digital multimeter Refer to “4.4: Setting mode”.
indicates 5V. Otherwise if it is known load resistance Totalized value can be reset using the indicator or BT200.
value, it indicates R x 0.02A.
(1) Reset operation using BT200
4. Check output value after set 50% in Parameter J10.
Enter to B42 (TOTAL RESET), and move the video bar
5. Check output value after set 0% in Parameter J10.
to “EXECUTE”. Push “ENTER” key at 2 times.
(2) Reset operation using indicator
Enter to “Setting mode”, move to B42 of parameter
number, and enter to “01” of data Number.
Refer to “4.4 : Setting mode”.

6-1 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
6. OPERATION

6.1.5 Unit of Pulse Output (Scaling) 6.2 Adjustment for Manual Mode
Pulse output are constructed by two units, that are “Scaled digitalYEWFLO does not need the initial adjustment because
pulse and Unscaled Pulse”. digitalYEWFLO is always adjusted by itself automatically.

(1) Scaled Pulse These adjustments should be done in case that


When SCALED PULSE is selected in B20, set flowrate per indicator reads over zero at zero flow.
one pulse output. Rate unit is linking to the flow unit.
6.2.1 Low Cut Adjustment
(2) Unscaled Pulse
Adjust to noise elimination or zero flow in the low flowrate
When UNSCALED PULSE is selected in B20, it output (or low frequency) range.
number of vortex (vortex frequency) as a pulse-number, The settable range for low cut flowrate is below half of
which is detected from vortex shedder bar. (1.0 must be set minimum flowrate.
for this.)

Refer to 7.6 (1) Flow calculation. 6.2.2 Tuning


This adjustment should be done according to a flow figure
l Pulse Rate setting shown below.
Pulse rate setting are settable by “B21:PULSE RATE”.

START
6.1.6 Power Failure
When a power failure occurs, the totalized value will be
No
protected by EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Is it zero flow? Stop flow to be zero
ROM). But during a power failure, the vortex flowmeter
Yes
stops and also the totalizing will stop.

After a power is recovered, the vortex flowmeter and the


Set "TUNING AT ZERO"
totalizing start to work automatically. of "K25:N.B MODE"

EEPROM doesn’t need a battery for backup.


Wait more than 30 seconds
Ensure the complete of the
tuning function.

Is indication reads zero Yes Finishing the tuning


at zero flow? functios

No

Retry the tuning and ensure


Ensure TLA value
the pipeline conditions?

F060201.EPS

If this adjustment is executed, the following value is


changed.

K25:N.B MODE = MANUAL

K26:NOISE RATIO=Constant value

Minimum flowrate is increased when TLA value is


changed form initial value.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 6-2
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
6. OPERATION

1. Tuning method 6.3 Other Maintenance


(1) Ensure the condition of flowrate
The necessary condition for tuning function is zero 6.3.1 Cleaning Precautions
flow.
Care should be taken to prevent the build up of dirt, dust or
other material on the display glass and data plate. In case of
(2) Executing the tuning function.
its maintenance, soft and dry cloth is used.
Set “ TUNING AT ZERO” of “K25:N.B MODE”.
Wait more 30 second.

(3) Finishing the tuning functions


Using the BT200
(a) Press “DATA” key of BT200 function key.
(b) Ensure the indication of “MANUAL” which is
“K25:N.B MODE”
(“NOW TUNING” is indicated during tuning operation.)
Using the indicator
(a) Press “SHIFT” and “SET” key simultaneously.
(b) Press “SET” key and ensure “01” of Lower
indication.
(“02” is indicated during tuning operation. Execute (a),
(b) once again.)

2. TLA value
TLA values is possible to change after executing “TUN-
ING”. In this case, minimum flowrate is increased.

Minimum flowrate for TLA value is given by below


equation.

Minimum Flowrate Specified Minimum TLA Value after Tuning


after changing TLA Flowrate
Value TLA initial value or defalt value
F060202.EPS

Ensure minimum flowrate for changing TLA value.

3. Output
After tuning, ensure that the indication reads is zero where
no fluid is flowing.

If the indication reads over zero is done continuously, retry


the tuning and ensure the below condition.

Does high vibrations occur in pipeline?

In this case, refer to “2:INSTALLATION”, and keep the


pipeline properly.

6-3 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
6. OPERATION

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 6-4
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
7. MAINTENANCE

7. MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Disassemble work should be done only for error occurrence.


• Maintenance work must be carried out by expert engineer or skilled personnel and not by operators.
• Before opening the cover, it is important to ensure that at least 10 minutes have passed since the
power was turned off. Furthermore, opening of the cover must also be carried out by expert engineer or
skilled personnel.

CAUTION

• It is prohibited by law for the user to modify flameproof instruments. It is not permitted to add or remove
indicators. If modification is required, contact YOKOGAWA.
• Explosion protected type must be, as a rule, removed to a non-hazardous area for maintenance and be
disassembled and reassembled to the original state.
• For TIIS, ATEX and SAA explosion proof, the display cover is locked by the clamp. In case of opening
the display cover, use the hexagonal wrench attached.
• Be sure to lock the cover by the clamp using the hexagonal wrench attached after installing the cover.

7-1 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
7. MAINTENANCE

7.1 Changing the Terminal Box Orientation


The terminal box can be changed in four directions with respect to the flow direction.

Integral Type Vortex Flowmeter Remote Converter Type Vortex Flowmeter

<1> Remove the converter cover. <1> Remove the terminal box cover.
<2> For amplifier unit removal, refer to paragraph 3.7.2. <2> Loosen two screws to disconnect leadwires from shedder
<3> Disconnect the vortex shedder assembly lead-wires from bar.
the converter. <3> Remove the bracket mounting bolts and remove the
<4> Remove the bracket mounting bolts and remove the terminal box and bracket from the flowmeter body.
converter and bracket from the flowmeter body. The bracket The bracket applies to the 1 (25mm) to 4 (100mm) inch
applies to the 1 (25mm) to 4 (100mm) inch flowmeters. flowmeters.
<5> Remove the four allen bolts securing the converter to the <4> Remove the four allen bolts securing the terminal box to the
bracket. bracket.
<6> Turn the converter to the desired orientation. When <5> Turn the terminal box to the desired orientation. When
reassembling the converter, reverse the above procedure. reassembling the terminal box, reverse the above
procedure.
Clamp
Clamp
Only for TIIS,
ATEX, and SAA Only for TIIS,
3mm
Explosion proof ATEX, and SAA 3mm
Explosion proof
Terminal Box

Shielded Cover
Terminal Box Cover Bracket
Amplifier Unit
Bracket
Indicator
Converter Bracket Mounting
Mounting Bolt
Bolt Locking
Lock Screw Allen Bolt
Screw
Bracket
Mounting Wire*
Wire* Vortex Shedder
Bolt
Converter Cover Assembly
Vortex Shedder
Assembly
*Wire Color Terminal
*Wire Color Terminal
Red A Red A
White B White B
Body
Body

F070101.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 7-2
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
7. MAINTENANCE

7.2 Indicator Removal and Rotation 7.4 Amplifier Unit Assembling


(1) Turn the power OFF.
(2) Remove the cover.
* In case of the Explosion protected type, remove the
IMPORTANT
cover after unlock the clamp. The amplifier unit must be assembled keeping the
(3) For the indicator, disconnect the cable connector from procedure as follows. Amplifier may not operate
the amplifier unit. normally when the procedure does not keep.
(4) Loosen the two indicator mounting screws using a
Phillips screwdriver.
(5) Pull out the indicator. (1) Put two-mounting pins 1 into mounting hole 2 .
(6) Reinstall the indicator in the reverse order to its removal (2) Push the head of two mounting screws 4 lightly.
(above) and secure the mounting screws. (3) Push head of two IC 5 and mount the amplifier unit 3 .
(4) Tighten two mounting screws 4 .

1 Mounting Pins
90°
3 Amplifier Unit

5 IC

2 Mounting Holes
Indicator Indicator Mounting Screws
(2PCS)
F070201.EPS 4 Mounting Screw

Figure 7.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Indicator


F070401.EPS

Figure 7.2 Removing and Reinstalling the Amplifier Unit


7.3 Amplifier Unit Removal

IMPORTANT

Do not turn the amplifier unit for removal or assem-


bling. The connector pins may be damaged.

(1) Turn the power OFF.


(2) Remove the converter cover.
* In case of the Explosion protected type, remove the
cover after unlock the clamp.
(3) Remove the indicator according to the procedures
described in paragraph 7.2.
(4) Loosen the terminal screws and remove the amplifier
unit.

7-3 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
7. MAINTENANCE

7.5 Vortex Shedder Removal In case of High Temperature Version (Option code: HT),
First time tighten Nuts with a torque wrench, applying the
torque specified “A”.

CAUTION Next time loosen Nuts completely, then again tighten Nuts
with a torque wrench, applying the torque specified “B”.
• Disassemble work should be done only for error
occurrence. e. Insert the leadwires (vortex shedder) through the
• Only expert engineer or skilled personnel are terminal box bottom hole and lower the terminal box
slowly until the bracket touches the flowmeter
permitted to open the cover.
shoulder. Be sure to keep the leadwires vertical
• When the vortex shedder is disassembled, and
while lowering the terminal box.
empty the flow tube before the gasket must be
f. After assembling, confirm that there is no leakage
replaced with a new one.
from the vortex flowmeter.
• Output error may cause when the shedder bar
is not restored correctly.
• For Explosion proof type, move vortex flowme-
ter to non-hazardous area firstly, then do the
assemble work.

(1) Remove the converter cover.


(2) For Integral Type, loosen the terminal screws and
disconnect leadwires on the amplifier and loosen 4
screws to disassemble the Amplifier. And for Remote
Type, remove the terminal box cover in the same way.
(3) Loosen the bracket mounting bolts and remove the
terminal box together with the bracket. Be careful not to
damage the leadwires connected to the vortex shedder
assembly when removing the terminal box.
(4) Loosen the vortex shedder assembly mounting bolts or
nuts and remove the vortex shedder assembly.
(5) When reassembling the vortex shedder assembly, reverse
above procedure. Confirm the following.
a. The gasket should be changed to new one.
b. The guide pin on the vortex shedder mounting block
meets the guide pin hole. See Figure 7.3. The guide
pin applies to the 1 to 4 inch flowmeters.
c. The vortex shedder assembly is installed as illus-
trated in Figure 7.3.
d. Tighten the sensor mounting bolts or nuts with a
torque wrench, applying the torque specified below.

Table 7.1 Torque Value


UNIT: kg.m ( b.in)
Nominal Size High Temperature (HPT)
Standard
mm (inch) A B
15 (1/2) 1.6 (140)
25 (1) 1.2 (105) 1.75 (153) 1.2 (105)
40 (1-1/2) 1.2 (105) 1.75 (153) 1.2 (105)
50 (2) 2 (174) 5 (435) 2 (174)
80 (3) 3 (260) 10 (870) 4 (348)
100 (4) 4 (348) 10 (870) 5 (435)
150 (6) 5 (435) 7 (608) 5 (435)
200 (8) 7 (610) 10 (870) 7 (608)
250 (10) 16 (1390)
300 (12) 16 (1390)
T070501.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 7-4
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
7. MAINTENANCE

*
Converter Case Color Wire
Vortex shedder Red A
Mounting Nut
Clamp White B
Shielded Cover Vortex shedder
Mounting Block
Amplifier Unit Bracket
Indicator
Leadwire
Converter Cover
Locking
Screw
Converter
Mounting Bolt
Bracket
Mounting Vortex Shedder
Bolt Assembly
Integral Type Gasket

Terminal Box
Clamp
Locking
Terminal
Screw Bracket
Box Cover

Bracket
Mounting
Bolt

Allen Bolt
Remote Type

Vortex Shedder Vortex Shedder Leadwire


Assembly Mounting Block

Vortex Shedder Flow direction


Assembly Pin
Guide Pin Hole
Guide Pin Hole
Vortex Shedder
Vortex Shedder Assembly
Direction Assembly
of Flow
Flow Direction Arrow

Flow direction
F070501.EPS

Figure 7.3 Disassembling and Reassembling the Vortex Shedder Assembly

7-5 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
7. MAINTENANCE

7.6 Setting Switches 7.6.2 Setting of Write Protect Switch


By setting the write protect function to “Protect”, it is
7.6.1 Setting of Burnout Switch possible to prevent the overwriting of parameters. Write
digitalYEWFLO is equipped with a CPU error burnout protection can be carried out using either the hardware switch
function used to set the output direction upon CPU error, and on the CPU board (i.e., Switch 2) or software parameter
a sensor burnout function that sets the direction of the output settings. If either of these items is set to “Protect”, the
in the event of burnout of the temperature sensor. When overwriting of parameters will be prohibited.
factory-shipment under normal conditions, the output of both
CPU error burnout and sensor burnout are set to HIGH, but if
suffix code/C1 is specified, the CPU error burnout is set to NOTE
LOW(-2.5% below) output, and sensor burnout is set to
LOW(-2.5% below) output, respectively. The setting of the If the hardware switch is set to “Protect”, it will
direction of output from burnout can be changed. not be possible to overwrite parameters; further-
more, this condition will be maintained until the
To change the direction of output arising from burnout,
switch is set to “Enable”.
switch the setting pin on the CPU assembly (see Table 7.2).
Table 7.2 Output Setting Pin for Burnout

Pin
CPU error CPU error For more details regarding usage of the write protect function
burnout burnout Remark and the software’s parameter switches, refer to 4.6.11 Write
position
direction output
Protect.
L H Table 7.3 Setting pin for Write Protect
110% or more Set to HIGH before
HIGH (21.6mA DC) shipment. CPU error
Pin position
burnout direction

L H Set to LOW for Y N


-2.5% or less
LOW (3.6mA DC) option specification Enable
code / C1.

T070601.EPS

Y N
P Protect

T070602.EPS

COM TP2

HHT Pin position of


Write Protect Switch
(See 7.6.2)
Pin position of Burnout Switch
F070601.EPS

Figure 7.4 Pin position of Burnout and Write Protect


Switch

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 7-6
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
7. MAINTENANCE

7.7 Software Configuration SE : Span factor (ex. E+ 3 is 103.)


PE: Pulse rate (ex. E+ 3 is 103.)
(1) Flow Calculation Tf: Temperature at operating conditions (°C)
The flowrate is calculated with the following equations based (°F)
on the N number of generated vortices: FS: Flowrate span
TE: Total factor
(a) Flowrate (in engineering units)
D: Internal diameter (m) (inch)
1 . . . . 1 . . µ: Viscosity (cP)
RATE=N. ε ε ε Uk UTM
t f e r KT ρf: Density at operating conditions (kg/m3) (lb/ft3)
.... (7.1.1)
(2) Flow Conversion Factor (Uk)
KT=KM . UKT . {1–4.81x(Tf–15)x10–5}.... (Metric Units)
Flow conversion factor Uk is obtained by carrying out the
.... (7.1.2)
following computation depending on the selection of the fluid
KT=KM . {1–2.627x(Tf–59)x10–5} .... (English Units)
.... (7.1.3) to be measured and the flow unit.
(b) Flowrate (%) (a) Steam
1 M (Mass flowrate): Uk=ρf . Uρf . Uk (kg) .... (7.7.1)
RATE(%)=RATE . .... (7.2) Uk=ρf . Uk (lb) .... (7.7.2)
FS
Qf (Flowrate at operation): Uk=Uk (m3) .... (7.7.3)
(c) Totalized value Uk=Uk (acf) .... (7.7.4)
TOTAL=TOTAL + nTOTAL (b) Gas
Qn: (Flowrate at STP):
1 1
TOTAL=RATE · t · · .... (7.3) Pf Pf + 273.15 1
TR UTM Uk = · · · Uk (Nm ) 3
.... (7.8)
Pn Pn + 273.15 K
(d) Pulse output frequency
5
1 1 Pf 9 (Tn-32) + 273.15 1
PULSE FREQ=RATE · P · U .... (7.4.1) Uk = · · · Uk (scf)
5
R TM Pn 9 (Tn-32) + 273.15 K
1 1
PULSE FREQ= N · · P .... (Unscaled pulses) M: (Mass flowrate): Uk=ρf . Uρf . Uk (kg) .... (7.9.1)
t R
Uk=ρf . Uρf . Uk (lb) .... (7.9.2)
.... (7.4.2)
Qf: (Flowrate): Uk=Uk (m3) .... (7.10.1)
(e) Velocity
Uk=Uk (acf) .... (7.10.2)
1 1 4 (c) Liquid
V=N . . . UKT . .... (7.5)
t KT πD
2
Qf: (Flowrate): Uk=Uk (m3) .... (7.11.1)
(f) Reynolds number Uk=Uk (acf) .... (7.11.2)
1 M (Mass flowrate): Uk=ρf . U (kg) .... (7.12.1)
Red=V . D . ρf . x 1000 .... (Metric Units) Uk=7.481xρf . U (lb) .... (7.12.2)
µ
7.481 is a conversion factor of U.S
.... (7.6.1)
gal into acf
1 (d) User’s unit
Red=V . D . ρf . x 124 .... (English Units)
µ Uk=Uk (user) .... (7.13)
.... (7.6.2) where
where N: Number of input pulses (pulse) M: Mass flow
∆t: Time corresponding to N (seconds) Qn: Volumetric flow in a Normal condition
εf: Instrumental error correction factor M: Mass flow
εe: Expansion correction factor for compressive Qf: Volumetric flow in an operating condition
fluid ρf: Specific weight (kg/m3), (lb/acf)
εr: Reynolds number correction factor hf: Specific enthalpy (kcal/kg), (Btu/lb)
KT: K-factor at operating conditions (pulses/ Tf: Temperature in an operating condition (°C), (°F)
litre) (pulse/gal) Tn: Temperature in a Normal condition (°C), (°F)
KM: K-factor at temperature 15°C (59°F) Pf: Pressure in an operating condition (kg/cm2 abs), (psia)
UKT: Unit conversion factor for K-factor Pn: Pressure in a Normal condition (kg/cm2 abs), (psia)
Uk: Flow unit conversion factor (Refer to item K: Deviation factor
(2)) ρn: Density in a Normal condition (kg/Nm3), (lb/scf)
Uk(user): Flow unit conversion factor for user’s unit ρf: Density in an operating condition (kg/m3), (lb/acf)
UTM: Factor corresponding to flow unit time (ex./ Uρf: Unit conversion factors of density.
m (minute) is 60.)

7-7 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
7. MAINTENANCE

Uk(kg), Uk(Nm3), Uk(m3)


Uk(lb), Uk(Btu), Uk(scf) , Uk(acf): Unit conversion factors

(3) Mass Flow calculation


a) Steam
In case of saturated steam, mass flow rate is calculated
from density values to temperature measured by using
saturated steam table.

In case of superheat steam, mass flow rate is calculated


from density values to temperature measured by using
steam table. In order to measure superheat steam, it is
necessary to make constant pressure value. A pressure
values which is entered in parameter is used.

M = ρft · Qf .......................................................................................................... (7.14.1)

b) Gas
In case of gas, Volumetric flow rate at standard
condition is calculated, so Pressure-Temperature
correction is carried out. It is necessary to make
constant pressure value. A Pressure values at opera-
tional condition, temperature and pressure value at
standard condition which is entered in parameter is used.

P Tn + 273.15 1
Qn = Qf · ––f · –––––––––– · –– ............................ (7.14.2)
Pn TfT + 273.15 K

c) Liquid
In case of liquid, mass flow late is calculated from
which used to calculate the secondary function for the
density value to the temperature. A density value which
indicated by the order sheet is used.

M = ρn · Qf · {1 + a1(Tft – Tn) · 10-2 + a2(Tft – Tn)2 · 10-6}


........................................................................ (7.14.3)

Where

M : Mass flow
Qn : Volumetric flow rate in a Standard condition
Qf : Volumetric flow rate in a operating condition
ρft : Density calculated by temperature value
ρn : Density in a Standard condition (kg/m3), (lb/cf)
Pf : Pressure in an operating condition (kPa abs), (psi)
Pn : Pressure in a standard condition (kpa abs), (psi)
Tn : Temperature in an operating condition (°C), (°F)
Tf : Temperature in a standard condition (°C), (°F)
Tft : Measured temperature value (°C), (°F)
a1 : 1st temperature coefficient
a2 : 2nd temperature coefficient

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 7-8
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
8. TROUBLESHOOTING

8. TROUBLESHOOTING

CAUTION

Please avoid replacing the amplifier unit from the case, and the vortex shedder bar. When these procedures are
needed, please contact the nearest Yokogawa office.

8.1 Flow
Large flowmeter errors and flowrate reading fluctuates.

• If a built-in indicator is attached,


check the display of the error code.
• Connect a hand-held terminal and
check self-diagnostic.
Is there a snapping Yes Check the cavitation
sound from the flowmeter ? referring to "9.5:Sizing".

No
Was a faulty area Yes
found with selfdiagnosis?

Is digitalYEWFLO No
Refer to the error code list Ground YEWFLO.
properly grounded?
No and check for recovery
measures.
Yes
Are the parameters
No Configure the parameters
configured correctly at
correctly
operating conditions?
Does the value in Yes This case is due to coating
"K34:VORTEX FREQ." of stuff vortex shedder bar.
Yes undergo a lot of Check the piping inner
changes? surfaces.

Ensure the straight lengths


Is straight lengths of No No
of pipeline referring to
pipeline stable? "2:INSTALLATION".

Normal
Yes

Yes
Yes Replace the gaskets
Does gaskets protrudes? referring "2:INSTALLATION".
Check standards.

No
Note 1: This is the temperature and pressure at digitalYEWFLO
mounted place.
Note 2: Contact with our service in case this is not carried out into
the right statement.
F080101.EPS

l After the output showed correctly, the indication


goes down to zero at certain time. How to cope with this problem
When this problem occurred, the cause is suspected of 1) Referring item 7.5 “Vortex Shedder Removal”, take out
deterioration of sensor sensitivity and turbulent of fluid flow the Vortex Shedder bar and clean it.
due to coating on the shedder bar and flowmeter inner tube. 2) If there is the coating on inner tube of the flowmeter,
remove the flowmeter body from adjacent pipes and
clean it.

8-1 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
8. TROUBLESHOOTING

No output is indicated when the fluid is flowing.


• If a built-in indicator is attached,
check the display of the error code.
• Connect a hand-held terminal and
check self-diagnostic.

Was a faulty area Yes


found with selfdiagnosis?

Refer to the error code list and check


No for recovery measures.

Is the output signal current No


present?

Yes
Are the power polarities No Check the
correct? polarities.
Is "6.1.3:Loop test" No Replace the
OK? AMP unit. Yes

Yes

Are there any disconnected Yes Fasten the


power terminals? power terminal.
Are parameters configured No Configure the
correctly at operating
parameters correctly.
conditions?
No

Yes

Yes Replace the


Is the cable broken?
cable.
No
Is "K34:VORTEX FREQ" 0Hz?

No
Yes
Yes Replace the
Is the low cut configured correctly?
AMP unit.

No
Configure the Low
cut value correctly.

Is the TLA value configured No Configure the TLA value referring to


correctly? "6.2.2:Tuning"

Yes

Is the density value configured No Configure the density value correctly


correctly? at operating conditions.

Yes

Is output indicated when


No Yes Replace the
"K25:N.B MODE" is "MANUAL" Is there broken the sensor?
and "K26:NOISE RATIO" is "0" shedder bar

No
Yes

Replace the
This case is due to coating of AMP unit.
vortex shedder bar.
Check the shedder bar piping inner
surfaces.
F080102.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 8-2
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
8. TROUBLESHOOTING

Output is indicated at zero flow.


• If a built-in indicator is attached,
check the display of the error code .
• Connect a hand-held ter minal and
check self-diagnostic.

Was a aulty
f area Yes
found with selfdiagnosis?

Refer to the error code list and chec


k
No for recovery measures .

Yes
Is fluid flowing? Stop flow.

No

Are parameters configured No


correctly at operating Configure the parameters correctly
.
conditions?

Yes

Are the load resistance No


and supply voltage within Adjust to within the tolerance limits.
the tolerance limits?

Yes

Is digitalYEWFLO No
properly grounded? Ground digitalYEWFLO
.

Yes

No
Does low cut adjust? Adjust to low cut.

Yes

No
Does the tuning e
xecute? Execute the tuning referring
"6.2:Adjustment or
f manual mode"

Yes

Does high vibrations Yes


Eliminate vibration noise using pipe
occurs in pipeline? support.

No

Are pulsation produced?


Check the pipeline conditions
referring "2:INST
ALLATION"
F080103.EPS

8-3 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
8. TROUBLESHOOTING

8.2 Flow (Only for /MV)


Start with this flow in case of /MV.

• If a built-in indicator is attached,


check the display of the error
code.
• Connect a hand-held terminal and
check self-diagnostic.

Yes
Was a faulty area
found with self-diagnostic?

Refer to the error code list and check


for recovery measures.
No

Are the power polarities No


Check the polarities.
Correct?

Yes

Are the load resistance No


and supply voltage within Adjust to within the tolerance limits.
the tolerance limits?

Yes

Are the sensor No


Check the sensor.
connected correctly?

Yes

Are the parameters


No
confiured correctly at Configure the parameters correctly.
operational conditions?

Yes

Go to “8.1 Flow”

F080201.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 8-4
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9.1 Outline Remote Type


The Remote Converter Type Vortex Flowmeter (DY-N) is
This vortex flowmeter measures liquid, gas and steam flow used with the Model DYA Vortex Flow Converter. A special
rates and converts them to a 4 to 20mA DC output or pulse,
cable (DYC) is used between these instruments.
alarm, status output signal.

Since the converter is mounted independently from the Model DYA Vortex flow converter
flowmeter, it permits remote flow measurements of high (built-in indicator)

temperature liquid, steam, etc.

Integral Type
The Integral Type Vortex Flowmeter (DY-A) has the Model DYC Cable

converter with the flowmeter, and measures liquid, gas and


steam flow rates and converts them to a 4 to 20mA DC
output or pulse, alarm, status output signal.

Flange Type
(built-in indicator)

Model DY-N
Vortex flowmeter
F090102.EPS

Figure 9.1.2 External Views (Remote Type)

• Name of a portion of the flowmeter (Ex-


ample of the Wafer Type)

Electrical
Wafer Type Connection Converter Case
Cover (long or short) Data Plate

Cover (Short)

Converter
3U
A

Bracket
For remote converter
type,between Converter
and Detector should be
connected by remote
cable of Model DYC.
Bolt Hole

Detector

F090101.EPS

Figure 9.1.1 External Views (Integral Type)


Body
(Process Connection)
F090103.EPS

Figure 9.1.3 Example of Name of portion

9-1 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9.2 Standard Specifications Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes


International Inc.
Refer to GS 01F06F01-01E for Fieldbus communica- Shedder bar:
tion type, marked with “e”. - 1.4301 stainless steel
- 1.4517 duplex stainless steel
Performance Specifications - DSD1-H duplex stainless steel
- DCS1 duplex stainless steel
Fluid to be Measured : DCS1 and DSD1-H are registered trademarks of
Liquid, Gas, Steam (Avoid Multiphase Flow Daido Tokusyu Steel Co.
and Sticky Fluids) Gasket: JIS SUS316 stainless steel with
Measuring Flow Rates : polytetrafluoroethylene coating.
Refer to Table 9.5.2 Converter housing and case, cover:
Accuracy : ±0.75% of Reading (Liquid) Aluminum alloy
±1% of Reading (Gas, Steam) Coating Color:
Refer to P9-15 Converter case, cover : Deep sea moss green
For the Multi-Variable Type, refer to 9.4.2 term. (Munsell 0.6GY 3.1/2.0) (Polyurethane corrosion-
resistant coating)
Repeatability : ± 0.2% of Reading
Protection:
Calibration :
IP67. NEMA 4X
This flowmeter is factory-calibrated using a Hazardous Area Classifications:
water flow. Refer to 9.4 Option Specifications.
Temperature and flow calibration by water
flow when /MV is selected. Electrical Connection:
Normal Operating Condition ANSI 1/2 NPT female,
ISO M20 x 1.5 female
Process Temperature Range : Signal Cable:
–29 to 260 °C (general) Model DYC cable, used for remote detector and
–196 to 100 °C (Cryogenic Version:option) converter.
–29 to 450 °C (High Process Temperature Max. length : 30 m.
Version:option) Outer Sheath Material: Heat resisting polyethylene
For the Multi-Variable Type, refer to 9.4.2 term. Durable Temperature : –40 to 150 °C
Refer to Figure 1 for integral converter type. Weight:
Process Pressure Limit : Refer to 9.6 External Dimension.
–0.1MPa (–1 kg/cm2) to flange rating. Mounting:
Ambient Temperature Range : Integral type and Remote type detector :
–29 to 85 °C (Remote type detector) Flange mounting or wafer mounting by
–40 to 85 °C (Remote type converter) flange adjacent to the pipeline.
–29 to 85 °C (Integral type, refer to Figure Remote type converter : 2 inch pipe mounting.
9.2.1)
–29 to 80 °C (Integral type with Indicator, refer Electrical Specifications
to Figure 9.2.1) Note*: Pulse output, alarm output and status output use
the common terminal, therefore these functions
–30 to 80 °C (Remote type converter with are not used simultaneously.
Indicator)
Ambient Humidity : 5 to 100% RH (at 40 °C) Output Signal (e) : Dual Output (Both Analog and
(No Condensation) Transistor contact output can be obtained
Power Supply Voltage (e) : simultaneously). In this case refer to “3:
without HART/BRAIN communication: WIRING”.
10.5 to 42 V DC for standard type Analog : 4 to 20 mA DC, 2-wire system.
10.5 to 42 V DC for flame proof type /KF1 Transistor Contact Output* :
10.5 to 42 V DC for explosion proof type /FF1 Open collector, 3-wire system.
10.5 to 30 V DC for intrinsically safe type /KS1, /FS1 Pulse, alarm, status output are selected by
10.5 to 30 V DC for non-incendive type /KN1 parameter setting.
10.5 to 24 V DC for intrinsically safe FF type /KS25 Contact rating: 30 V DC, 120 mA DC
10.5 to 32 V DC for intrisincally safe FF type /FS15 Low level: 0 to 2 V DC. (refer to Figure 9.2.3)
with HART/BRAIN communication: Communication Requirement :
Minimum supply voltage is 16.4 V Communication Signal :
(Refer to Figure 9.2.2 ; Relationship Between BRAIN or HART communication signal
Power Supply Voltage and Load Resistance) (superimposed on a 4 to 20 mA DC signal)
Conditions of Communication Line :
Mechanical Specifications Load Resistance :
Material (General Type): 250 to 600 Ω(including cable resistance).
Refer to Table 9.3.1 Refer to Figure 9.2.2
Body: Supply Voltage :
- CF8M casting stainless steel (equiv. 1.4408) 16.4 to 42 V DC for digital communications
- 1.4552 casting stainless steel BRAIN and HART protocols .(16.4 to 30 V DC
- WCB casting carbon steel ASTM-A216WCB for intrinsically safe type).
- CW-12MW (equiv. Hastelloy C276)
Refer to Figure 9.2.2

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-2
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Space from other Power Line: 15cm or Correction:


more (Parallel wiring should be avoided.) Instrument Error Correction:
BRAIN: Vortex flowmeter instrument errors can be
Communication Distance : corrected by segment approximations.
Up to 2 km, when polyethylene insulated Reynolds Number Correction:
PVC-sheathed cables (CEV cables) are used. Output error at Reynolds number 20000 or
Communication distance varies less is corrected by using five-break-point
depending on type of cable used. line-segment approximation.
Load Capacitance: 0.22 µF or less Gas Expansion Correction:
Load Inductance: 3.3 mH or less When measuring a compressibility gas and
Input Impedance of Receiver Connected to steam, this expansion factor is useful to
the Receiving Resistance: correct the error at high velocity of flow (35m/
10 kΩ or more at 2.4 kHz. s or more).
HART:
Communication Distance: Down-scale or Up-scale burn out.
Up to 1.5km(0.9 mile), when using multiple In case a CPU or EEPROM failure occurs,
twisted pair cables. Communication distance flow meter output the signal of Up-scale (21.6
varies depending on type of cable used. mA or more).
Cable Length for Specific Applications: Up-scale or Down-scale (3.6 mA or less) is
Use the following formula to determine cable user-selectable through the fail mode alarm
length for specific applications. jumper.
Indicator:
L= 65x10 – (Cf+10,000)
6

(RxC) C Flow rate (% or engineering units) or


temperature value and totalizer can be
where:
indicated simultaneously.
L=length in meters.
Short message for self diagnostics indicates.
R=resistance in ý (including barrier
Local parameter setting can be operated by
resistance)
key switches.
C=cable capacitance in pF/m or pF/ft.
In mounting direction, the right and left 90° is
Cf= maximum shunt capacitance of receiving
rotatable.
devices in pF/m or pF/ft.
NOTE: HART is a registered trademark of the HART
EMC Conformity Standards:
Communication Foundation. EN61326
Functions: AS/NZS CIS PR11
Damping Time Constant : Note: For remote converter type, the signal cable should
be used with the metal conduit.
0 to 99 Sec (63% response time) Pressure Equipment Directive:
Note: Delay time is 0.5 Sec.
Analog output circuit time constant is 0.3 Sec. Notified Body Identification Number 0038
Pulse Output Function*: Module H
Pulse output is selected from scaled pulse,
unscaled pulse, frequency (number of pulses MODEL DN (mm)* PS (MPa)* PS * DN (MPa*mm) CATEGORY**
output per second at 100% of output). DY015 15 42 630 Article 3,***
Pulse frequency : Max 10 kHz Paragraph 3
Duty cycles : Approx.50% (1:2 to 2:1)
Self -diagnostics and Alarm Output *: DY025 25 42 1050 Article 3,***
Paragraph 3
In case alarm (over range output signal,
EEPROM error, vibration noise, abnormal DY040 40 42 1680 II
flow such as clogging, bubble) occurs, an
DY050 50 42 2100 II
alarm signal is output and indicated.
The alarm signal output goes from close(ON) DY080 80 42 3360 II
to open(OFF) during alarming.
DY100 100 42 4200 II
Status Output Function *:
Flow Switch: DY150 150 42 6300 III
In case flow rate decreases under the flow set
DY200 200 42 8400 III
value, a status signal is output.
Status signal output mode can reverse (ON/ DY250 250 42 10500 III
OFF) . DY300 300 42 12600 III
Analog Output Function:
T00.EPS
Analog output is selected from flowrate
temperature value when option code /MV is * PS: Maximum allowable pressure for Flow tube,
selected. DN: Nominal size
Data Security During Power Failure: ** Refered to Table 6 coverd by ANNEX II of EC Directive 97/23/EC,
Pressure Equipment Directive PED
Data (parameter, totalizer value, etc) storage
*** DY015 and DY025 are not regulated by PED.
by EEPROM. No back-up battery required.

9-3 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

85
100 80
85
80
Ambient Temperature (˚C)

55
50

-29

-50
-50 0 50 100 200 260 300
-29 DYF Fig-01
Process Temperature (˚C)
With Indicator

Figure 9.2.1 Ambient Temperature limit (Integral Type)

600
E - 10.5
(Ω)

R=
0.0236 Communication
applicable range
Load Resistance

BRAIN or HART

250

10.5 16.4 24.7 30 42


DYF Fig-02
Power Supply Voltage E(V)

Figure 9.2.2 Relationship Between Power Supply


and Load Resistance

HIGH level
0 to 2 V
LOW level
0V
DYF Fig-03

Figure 9.2.3 High and low level (Pulse output)

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-4
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9.3 Model and Suffix Codes


DY Vortex Flowmeter (Integral Type, Remote type detector)
DYA Vortex Flowmeter Converter (Remote Type)
Model Suffix Code Description
Model Suffix Codes Description
…………………………… DYA ……………………………… Vortex Flowmeter Converter
DY015 Size 15 mm (½ inch)
DY025 …………………………… Size 25 mm (1 inch) (Remote Type)
DY040 …………………………… Size 40 mm (1½ inch)
……………………………
Output -D………………………… 4 to 20 mA DC, Pulse
DY050 Size 50 mm (2 inch) BRAIN Communication
…………………………… Signal
DY080 Size 80 mm (3 inch)
DY100 …………………………… Size 100 mm (4 inch) /Communi- -E………………………… 4 to 20 mA DC, Pulse
DY150 …………………………… Size 150 mm (6 inch) cation HART Communication
DY200 …………………………… Size 200 mm (8 inch) *1 *13 -F………………………… Digital communication
DY250 …………………………… Size 250 mm (10 inch) (FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol)
DY300 …………………………… Size 300 mm (12 inch)
Electrical 2…………………… ANSI 1/2 NPT Female *6
-D ………………………… 4 to 20 mA DC, Pulse, Connection *11 4…………………… ISO M20 ×1.5 Female
BRAIN Communication
Output -E ………………………… 4 to 20 mA DC, Pulse, Indicator D ……………… With Indicator
Signal
HART Communication N ……………… None Indicator
/Commu- -F …………………………
Digital communication Options / Refer to Option Specifications
nication
(FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol)
*1*12 -N ………………………… Remote type detector
Body B ……………………… Stainless steel (CF8M / equiv. 1..4408) *3
Material C ……………………… Stainless steel (1. 4552)
*2*14 W ……………………… Carbon steel (WCB) *15 DYC Signal Cable
X ……………………… Others Model Suffix Code Description
Shedder bar L ………………… Standard DYC ……………………………… Signal Cable
Material *4 X ………………… Others
Process AA1 ….………..… ANSI Class 150 Wafer Cable -0……………………………… Without End finish *8
Connection AA2 ….………..… ANSI Class 300 Wafer End -1……………………………… With End finish
*3 *5 AA4 ….………..… ANSI Class 600 Wafer -05………………………… 5m
AD1 ….………..… DIN PN16 Wafer -10………………………… 10 m
AD2 ….………..… DIN PN16 Wafer -15………………………… 15 m
AD3 ….………..… DIN PN25 Wafer Cable -20………………………… 20 m
AD4 ….………..… DIN PN40 Wafer Length -25………………………… 25 m
RF: Raised Face BA1 ….………..… ANSI Class 150 Flange (RF)
SF:Smooth Finish *16 -30………………………… 30 m
BA2 ….………..… ANSI Class 300 Flange (RF)
RJ:Ring Joint - m *9
BA4 ….………..… ANSI Class 600 Flange (RF)
BA5 ….………..… ANSI Class 900 Flange (RF) Options /C …………………… Cable End Finish Parts *10
BS1 ….………..… ANSI Class 150 Flange (RF, SF) /MV …………………… Signal cable for temperature
BS2 ….………..… ANSI Class 300 Flange (RF, SF) sensor type *13
BS4 ….………..… ANSI Class 600 Flange (RF, SF)
DYF Tab-02
BS5 ….………..… ANSI Class 900 Flange (RF, SF)
BD1 ….………..… DIN PN10 Flange (RF)
BD2 ….………..… DIN PN16 Flange (RF)
BD3 ….………..… DIN PN25 Flange (RF)
BD4 ….………..… DIN PN40 Flange (RF)
BD5 ….………..… DIN PN64 Flange (RF)
BD6 ….………..… DIN PN100 Flange (RF)
BD7 ….………..… DIN PN160 Flange (RF)
CA4 ….………..… ANSI Class 600 Flange (RJ)
CA5 ….………..… ANSI Class 900 Flange (RJ)
Electrical -2……….......… ANSI ½ NPT Female *6
Connection *11 -4……….......… ISO M20 x1.5 Female
Indicator *7 D ………...… With Indicator
N …….......... None Indicator, Remote type detector
Options / Refer to Option Specifications
DYF Tab-01

* 1 : Nominal size, Fluid (Liquid, Gas, Steam), Density, Viscosity, Pressure, Temperature, Flow range, Parameters are set at the factory before shipment.
* 2 : Refer to Table 1.
In case of /NC or /HY or /HT or /LT, select X (others).
The body material (CF8M or 1.4552 or WCB) varies according to each sales area. Please contact YOKOGAWA sales person.
* 3 : In case of B (CF8M), the process connection is available for ANSI (AA1 to 4, BA1 to 5, CA4 to 5) and DIN (AD1 to AD4, BD1 to 4 ).
* 4 : Refer to Table 1.
In case of /NC or /HY or /HT or /LT, select X (others).
The shedder bar material (1.4517 (1.4301 for DN15), DCS1 (15mm is DSD1-H)) varies according to each sales area. Please contact YOKOGAWA sales
person.
* 5 : Refer to Table 2.
* 6 : In case of /FF1, the screw length is deeper than ANSI standard for 0.5 to 3.5 threads.
* 7 : Indicator is not available for remote type detector.
* 8 : One set of end finish part is attached.
* 9 : Fill in two digit figure per 5 m unit (e.g. 35 m, 40 m etc.). The cable can be cut to required length within 30 m at customer side. In this case, select Cable
End Code [-0].
*10 : An entered digit figure shows required set quantity. Only for Cable End Code [-0]
*11 : In case of an explosion protect type, it depends for an electrical connection on the kind of an explosion protect type. Refer to “ OPTION SPECIFICATION
(HAZARDOUS AREA CLASSIFICATIONS)”
*12 : For FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol, refer to GS 01F06F01-01E. For Fieldbus communication type, there are no setting keys on the display board.
*13 : Essentially, DYA- /MV and DY -N***/MV should be combined.
*14 : Users must consider the characteristics of selected wetted parts material and the influence of process fluids. The use of inappropriate materials can result
in the leakage of corrosive process fluids and cause injury to personnel and/or damage to plant facilities. It is also possible that the instrument itself can be
damaged and that fragments from the instrument can contaminate the user's process fluids.
Be very careful with highly corrosive process fluids such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrogen sulfide, sodium hypochlorite, and high-temperature
steam (150 °C [302 °F] or above). Contact Yokogawa for detailed information of the wetted parts material.
*15 : Body material carbon steel (WCB): Due to wet calibration DY will always generate superficial rust in the flow path and on the surface during shipping to
customer site. The superficial oxidation has no influence on the accuracy of the flowmeter. Unfortunately the oxidation can not be avoided with carbon
steel body material.
*16 : Flange surface in standard roughness without grooves.

9-5 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Table 1 Body, Shedder bar, Gasket Material


Material Process Connection

Option Item Option Code Wafer


(Note 1) (Note 1) Body Shedder bar Gasket Type Model Flange Type Model Code
(Note 2) (Note 3) Code (Note 12)

CF8M / 1.4408 1.4517 (1.4301) DY015 DY015 DY025-/R1 DY040-/R2


General
1.4552 DCS1 (DSDH-1) up to up to up to up to
(REFERENCE) (Note 4)
WCB (Note 11) DY100 DY300 DY200-/R1 DY200-/R2
(Note 11) (Note 7+8+9)
Compliance with 1.4552 DY015 DY015 DY025-/R1 DY040-/R2
NACE NC CF8M (Note 5) (Note 4) up to up to up to up to
(Note 8+14) DY100 DY200 DY150-/R1 DY200-/R2
(Note 10)
CF8M / 1.4408 DY015 DY015 DY025-/R1 DY040-/R2
Anti-corrosion 1.4552 up to up to up to up to
HY (Note 5) (Note 4)
Version II WCB DY100 DY100 DY150-/R1 DY200-/R2
(Note 7+9+14)

Anti-corrosion CW-12MW DY015 DY015


HC (Note 13) (Note 5) (Note 4) up to up to — —
Version III
DY100 DY200
(Note 10)
CF8M / 1.4408 JIS SUS316 DY025 DY025 DY040-/R1 DY050-/R2
High Process
1.4552 (Note 5) stainless up to up to up to up to
Temperature HT
WCB steel plated DY100 DY200 DY200-/R1 DY200-/R2
Version (Note 6) (Note 7+8+9+14) with silver
1.4308 DY015 DY015
Cryogenic 1.4552
LT (Note 5) (Note 4) up to up to — —
Version (Note 6) equiv. SCS13 DY100 DY100

1.4552 DY025 DY025 DY025-/R1 DY025-/R1


CF8M / 1.4408 DCS1 (Note 4) up to up to up to up to
Multi Variable MV
WCB DY100 DY100 DY200-/R1 DY200-/R1
(Note 7+8+9+14)
(Note 1) Refer to item "Option Specifications"
(Note 2) In case of /NC or /HY or /HT or /LT in combination with body material ”B”, select body material code [-X]. The body material CF8M or 1.4552 or
WCB varies according to each sales area. Please contact YOKOGAWA sales person.
(Note 3) In case of /NC or /HY or /HT or /LT, select shedder bar material code [-X]. The shedder bar material (1.4517 (1.4301 for DN15) or DCS1 (15mm is
DSD1-H)) varies according to each sales area. Please contact YOKOGAWA sales person.
(Note 4) JIS SUS316 stainless steel with polytetrafluoroethylene (Teflon) coating
(Note 5) DY025 (DY040-/R1) to DY200 (DY200-/R1): CW-12MW (equiv. Hastelloy C)
DY015 (DY025-/R1): N10276 (equiv. Hastelloy C)
(Note 6) Remote type only. DYA converter and DYC cable should be used in combination.
(Note 7) Body material WCB only flange type 80 mm to 200 mm, but not for BA5, BD7, CA4, CA5
(Note 8) Process connection BA5, BD7,CA4,CA5 and DY150-BA4 only with body material CF8M.
(Note 9) Carbon steel (WCB) and CF8M / 1.4408 body material not available for wafer.
(Note 10) Material Conformity in accordance with NACE-MR0175-2003, EN-ISO 15156-3 and NACE-MR0103-2005.
(Note 11) Shedder material 1.4517 (1.4301 for DN15) available in combination with body material CF8M, 1.4552 or WCB.
Shedder material DCS1 (DSDH-1 for DN15) available in combination with body material CF8M.
DY250 and DY300 only available with body material CF8M.
(Note12) Reduced bore types (Option /R1 and /R2) available only with body material CF8M.
(Note13) Body material CW-12MW only available for DY015 to DY100 with AA1, AA2, AA4 and DY015 to DY200 with BA1, BA2. Please select body
material code [-X].
(Note14) In combination with option /HC, the body material is CW-12MW. DYF Tab-03

Table 2 Flowmeter Selection Guide

Wafer Flange (Raised Face) Flange (Ring Joint) Flange (Raised Face, Smooth Finish)
Process
Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix
Connection Model Code Model Code Model Code Model Code
Code Code Code Code

DY015 DY025-/R1 DY040-/R2 DY015 DY025-/R1 DY040-/R2


DY015 up to
ANSI Class 150 AA1
DY100
BA1 up to up to up to — — BS1 up to up to up to
DY300 DY200-/R1 DY200-/R2 DY300 DY200-/R1 DY200-/R2

DY015 DY025-/R1 DY040-/R2 DY015 DY025-/R1 DY040-/R2


DY015 up to
ANSI Class 300 AA2 BA2 up to up to up to — — BS2 up to up to up to
DY100
DY300 DY200-/R1 DY200-/R2 DY300 DY200-/R1 DY200-/R2
DY015 up to DY015 up to
ANSI Class 600 AA4 BA4 DY015 up to DY200 CA4 BS4 DY015 up to DY200
DY100 DY200
DY015 up to
ANSI Class 900 — — BA5 DY015 up to DY200 CA5 BS5 DY015 up to DY100
DY200
DY015 up to
DIN PN 10 AD1 BD1 DY015 up to DY200 — — — —
DY100
DY015 up to
DIN PN 16 AD2 BD2 DY015 up to DY200 — — — —
DY100
DY015 up to
DIN PN 25 AD3 BD3 DY015 up to DY200 — — — —
DY100
DY015 up to
DIN PN 40 AD4 BD4 DY015 up to DY200 — — — —
DY100

DIN PN 64 — — BD5 DY050 up to DY150 — — — —

DIN PN 100 — — BD6 DY015 up to DY150 — — — —

DIN PN 160 — — BD7 DY015 up to DY100 — — — —

(Note) DYF Tab-04


• ANSI standardized types are worked by serration finishing except the Smooth Finish type.
• Refer to “OPTION REDUCED BORE TYPE (/R1, /R2)” (P.9-12), when you select reduced bore type (/R1, /R2).

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-6
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9.4 Option Specifications


9.4.1 Option Specifications
Body Material
Item Specification Applicable Model Code
B C W X
Multi-Variable Type (Note 5) Built in Temperature sensor (Pt 1000 ) in vortex shedder bar. DY / DYA MV • • •
Reduced bore type (Note 8) Integrated and welded construction with concentric reduced bore piping.
See P.9-12 R1 : Detector size (B) is one meter body size down of digitalYEWFLO to flange R1 •
pipe size (A). DY
A B
R2 : Detector size (B) is two meter body size down of digitalYEWFLO to flange
pipe size (A).
R2 •
Stainless Steel Tag Plate (Note 1) SUS304 tag plate, hung on converter case. DY / DYA SCT • • • •
SUS304 bolt/nut assembly. DY
Stainless Steel Bolt & Nut Assembly
Used when a wafer type is installed. Wafer Type
BL • • •
Hydrostatic / Pneumatic Test Certificate Test pressure value is in accordance with Table 4. Test time: 10 min.
(Note 14) Available for the general type. Test medium: Air, Nitrogen or Water.
DY T01 • • • •
Hydrostatic Test Certificate
(Note 14)
Test pressure value is in accordance with Table 4. Test time: 10 min.
Available for the general type. Test medium: Water.
DY T02 • •
Level 2 Declaration and Calibration Equipment List DY / DYA L2 • • • •
Calibration Certificate Level 3 Declaration and Primary Standard List DY / DYA L3 • • • •
Level 4 Declaration and YOKOGAWA Measuring Instruments Control System DY / DYA L4 • • • •
User specified calibration A flow test at five user specified flow values is made with water after the
(Note 10) standard calibration. The flow values are limited by minimum flow acc. table 8 DY SC • • •
and max. flow velocity of 5.5 m/s.
Degrease Treatment (Note 2) Degrease cleansing treatment. DY K1 • •
Degrease Treatment ASTM
(Note 10)
Degreasing Treatment of wetted surfaces acc. ASTM.
DY DEG • •
Epoxy Coating Epoxy coating for meter cover and case. DY / DYA X1 • • • •
Epoxy and Polyurethane coating for the purpose of corrosion - proof
Pilling up coating to keep off corrosion
improvement; salt damage, alkali, climate and acidity
DY/DYA X2 • • • •
High Process Temperature Version For Liquid and Steam (NOT for Gas)
This specification temperature is from -29 to +450 °C
Refer to Table 1 DY***-N HT • • •
Refer to Table 5 for minimum velocity.
In case of another size, please contact to YOKOGAWA sales person.
This specification temperature is from -196 to +100 °C
Cryogenic Version Refer to Table 1 DY***-N LT • •
In case of another size, please contact to YOKOGAWA sales person.
Compliance with NACE (Note 9) Compliance with NACE. Refer to Table 1. DY NC • •
Anti-corrosion Version II (Note 10) Anti-corrosion Version II. Refer to Table 1. DY HY • • •
Anti-corrosion Version III (Note 10) Anti-corrosion Version III. Refer to Table 1. DY HC •
Compliance with NAMUR43. Current signal for measurement is 4 mA up to
Compliance with NAMUR (Note 6)
20.5 mA. Set output 3.6 mA or less when burn-out occurred.
DY / DYA NM • • • •
ESD compliance according Namur
(Note 10) (Note 12)
Internal protection covers for ESD enhancement DY / DYA ESD • • •
Down-scale burn-out in CPU or Current signal for measurement is 4 mA up to 21.6 mA.
EEPROM failure (Note 3) Set output to 3.6 mA or less when burn-out occurred.
DY***-D,E / DYA C1 • • • •
There is an arrester inside converter for power supply line.
Lightning Protector
Maximum power supply voltage: 30 V DC
DY***-D,E / DYA A • • • •
Stainless Steel Bracket for Remote
Converter (DYA)
The bracket material for remote converter type (DYA) is SUS304. DYA SB • • • •
Converter Installing Direction 180
Change (Note 4)
Converter installing direction 180° change inversely when shipped. DY CRC • • • •
Smooth flange finish Finish of flange facing Ra 3.2 ... 6.3.
(Note 10) (Note 13) Refer to Figure 6.
DY ASF • • •
Rough DIN Flange
(Note 10)
Finish of DIN Flange Ra 6.3 ... 25. DY DFC • • •
Smooth DIN Flange
(Note 10)
Finish of DIN Flange Ra 0.8 ...1.6. DY DFE • • •
DYF Tab-07-1

9-7 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Body Material
Item Specification Applicable Model Code B C W X
Each certificate to be attached produced by the vendors.

Item to be 1. Meterbody M01 • • • •


Material certificates: Mill sheets specified 1. Meterbody, 2. Shedder bar DY M02 • • • •
(Note 15) 1. Meterbody, 2. Shedder bar, 3. Bottom plug M03 • • • •
1. Meterbody, 2. Shedder bar, 3. Bottom plug, 4. Welding rod M04 • • • •
3.1 certificate which is attached according to EN10204.
Each certificate which is attached produced by the vendors.

Item to be
1. Meterbody
DY
E01 • • • •
Material certificates: 3.1
specified 1. Meterbody, 2. Shedder bar E02 • • • •
1. Meterbody, 2. Shedder bar, 3. Bottom plug E03 • • • •
1. Meterbody, 2. Shedder bar, 3. Bottom plug, 4. Welding rod E04 • • • •
Positive Material Identification certificate to be attached for the main 3 chemical
components of specified materials. Each certificate to be attached.
PAMI test certificate
Item to be 1. Meterbody PM1 • • • •
DY
specified 1. Meterbody, 2. Shedder bar PM2 • • • •
1. Meterbody, 2. Shedder bar, 3. Plug PM3 • • •
1. Meterbody, 2. Shedder bar, 3. Plug, 4. Plate PM4 • • •
1. Welder/Welding Operator Performance Qualification
(or Welder Qualification Record)
2. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)
3. Procedure Qualification Record (PQR)
Each certificate to be attached.
ASME welding
documents submission
The customer’s name and job name to be specified when ordered.
DY WP • • • •
Item to be 1. Welded portion for the bottom plug
specified 2. Welded portion for the flange in case of the welding
construction

Dye Penetrant test certificate for the welded portion to be attached.


Each certificate to be attached.

Dye Penetrant test certificate Item to be 1. Welded portion for the bottom plug DY PT • • • •
specified 2. Welded portion for the flange in case of the welding

construction

- Final Product Certificates (FPC) acc. to EN 10204:2004


- Certificate of marking transfer
- material Certificates acc. DIN EN 10204:2004 – 3.1 for all materials of body,
Final product certificate
(Note 10)
shedder bar, plug and plate and welding rod. DY FPC • • •
- Test Report acc. to DIN EN 10204:2004 - 2.2
(Note 11) - WQC, WPS, PQR for plug welding.
- Inspection Report to Dye-Penetration-Test acc. to EN 571 for plug welding.

(Note 1) When /SCT is not chosen, the specified Tag Number is engraved on the data plate.
When /SCT is chosen, the specified Tag Number is engraved on the data plate and stainless tag plate. The limitation of characters for Tag Number is, for BRAIN
communication or name plate, stainles steel tag plate: 16 characters, and for HART communication: 8 characters.
(Note 2) There is a case that calibration water should stay in the meter tube. So this is not degrease treatment in the strict sense.
(Note 3) The output is set to 3.6 mA or less (General type is set to 21.6 mA or more at shipping).
(Note 4) When /CRC is chosen, the electrical connection is turned to a downstream side.
(Note 5) Refer to “OPTION MULTI-VARIABLE (BUILD IN TEMPERATURE SENSOR) TYPE (/MV)” (p.9-11)
In case of Remote type detector (DY***-N), select “/MV” both DY and DYA.
(Note 6) /NM can not be combined with Remote type detector (DY***-N).
(Note 8) • Cryogenic version (/LT) is not available.
• High process temperature version (/HT) and Multi-variable type (/MV) for DY025/R1 and DY040/R2 are not available.
• Flange type only and available process connections are ANSI150, 300 (BA1,BA2,BS1,BS2).
• Flange piping size (A) means “DY***-” nominal size.
(Note 9) Limitations for the usage of wetted part materials according to NACE-MR0175-2003
(Note 10) Only available for DY015 to DY200; not available for flange type BS1 ... 5, CA4, CA5.
(Note 11) Accumulation of options /E04, /WP, /PT
(Note 12) Option /ESD is not possible / not necessary for units without display or with Foundation Fieldbus Communication.
(Note 13) Only available for DY015 to DY100 with AA1, AA2, AA4 and DY015 to DY200 with BA1, BA2, BA4, BA5.
(Note 14) In the Calibration Certificate is the confirmation (”OK”) included about the pressure test which was done with positive result.
(Note 15) Certificates may be substituted by Material Certificates acc. EN 10204-3.1, depending on material supplier. DYF Tab-07-2

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-8
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9.4.2 OPTION SPECIFICATIONS (For Explosion Protected Type)


Item Specification Code
ATEX (KEMA) ATEX (KEMA) Flame proof Approval

Type of protection : EExd IIC T6...T1 (Integral Type Flowmeter and Remote Type
Flowmeter) EExd IIC T6 (Remote Type Converter)
Groups : Group II
Category : Category 2G
Temperature Class : T6...T1 (Integral Type Flowmeter and Remote Type Flowmeter)
T6 (Remote Type Converter)
Process temp.: T6; 85 °C, T5;100 °C; T4;135 C; T3;200 °C;T2;300 °C; T1;450 °C
(Use /HT version above 260 °C) KF1
Degree of Protection of Enclosure : IP67
Tamb.(Integral Type Flowmeter and Remote Type Flowmeter) : –29 to +60 °C
Tamb.(Remote Type Converter) : –30 to +60 °C
Tamb.(Integral Type Flowmeter with indicator) : –29 to +60 °C
Tamb.(Remote Type Converter with indicator) : –30 to +60 °C
Ambient Humidity : 0 to 100 % RH
Maximum working Pressure : 42 MPa
Coating of Enclosure : Epoxy resin coating or Polyurethane resin coating.
Electrical Connection : ANSI 1/2 NPT female, ISO M20 ´ 1.5 female.

ATEX (KEMA) Intrinsically safe Approval (Note 1)

Type of protection : EEx ia IIC T4...T1 (Integral Type Flowmeter and Remote Type Flowmeter)
EEx ia IIC T4 (Remote Type Converter)
Groups : II
Category : 1G
Maximum Working Pressure : 42 MPa
Tamb.(Integral Type Flowmeter) : –29 to +60 °C
Tamb.(Remote Type Flowmeter) : –29 to +80 °C
Tamb.(Remote Type Converter) : –40 to +60 °C KS1
Ambient Humidity : 0 to 100%RH (No condensation)
Process temp. : T4;135 °C; T3;200 °C; T2;300 °C; T1; 450 °C
(Use /HT version above 260 °C)
For connection to certified Intrinsically Safe circuit with Signal/Supply and Pulse circuit of
Integral Type Flowmeter and Remote Type Converter
Ui=30 Vdc, Ii=165 mAdc, Pi=0.9 W, Ci=6n F, Li=0.15 mH
Connect sensor circuit of DYA and DY-N(/HT)
Maximum cable capacitance:160 nF
Electrical connection : ANSI 1/2NPT female, ISO M20 x 1.5 female.

CENELEC ATEX(KEMA) Intrinsically Safe Approval (Note 3)


Type of Protection: EEx ia IIC T4...T1 (Integral Type Flowmeter and Remote Type Flowmeter)
EEx ia IIC T4 (Remote Type Converter)
Groups: II
Category: 1G
Maximum Working Pressure: 42MPa
Tamb. (Integral Type Flowmeter): –29 to +60 °C
Tamb. (Remote Type Flowmeter): –29 to +80 °C
Tamb. (Remote Type Converter): –40 to +60 °C KS25
Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100 %RH (No condensation)
Process Temp.: T4; 135 °C, T3; 200 °C, T2; 300 °C, T1;450 °C
(Use /HT version above 260 °C)
For connection to certified Intrinsically Safe circuit with Supply circuit of Integral
Type Flowmeter and Remote Type Converter:
Ratings 1 (Entity): Ui=24 V, Ii=250 mA, Pi=1.2 W, Ci=1.76 nF, Li=0
Ratings 2 (FISCO): Ui=17.5 V, Ii=380 mA, Pi=5.32 W, Ci=1.76 nF, Li=0
Connect sensor circuit of DYA and DY-N (/HT)
Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2NPT female, ISO M20 × 1.5 female

ATEX Type "n" ATEX Type "n" approval (Note 2)


protection Type of protection : EEx nL IIC T4... T1 (Integral Type Flowmeter and Remote Type Flowmeter)
EEx nL IIC T4 (Remote Type Converter)
Group : II
Category : 3G
Maximum Working Pressure : 42MPa
Tamb. : –29 to +60 °C (Integral Type Flowmeter and Remote Type Converter) KN1
Tamb. : –29 to +80 °C (Remote Type Flowmeter)
Ambient Humidity : 0 to 100 %RH (No condensation)
Process temp.:T4;135 °C; T3;200 °C; T2(*);300 °C; T1(*); 450 °C
(*: Use /HT version above 260 °C)
Degree of protection of enclosure : IP67
Maximum cable capacitance: 160 nF
Electrical connection : ANSI 1/2NPT, ISO M20 x 1.5 female.
DYF Tab-05-02.EPS
(Note 1) For intrinsically safe approval, use the barrier certified by the testing laboratories (BARD-400 is not applicable).
(Note 2) "n" type = non incendive device
(Note 3) Please refer also to GS 01F06F01-01E for Foundation Fieldbus Communication Type

9-9 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

OPTION SPECIFICATIONS (For Explosion Protected Type) continued


Item Specification Code
Factory Mutual FM Explosion proof Approval
(FM)
Type of Protection : Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D;
Dust-ignitionproof Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G.
"SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES." "WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV.2,
SEALS NOT REQUIRED."
Enclosure Rating : NEMA TYPE 4X FF1
Temperature Code : T6
Ambient Temperature : –29 to 60 °C (Integral Type Flowmeter and Remote Type Flowmeter)
–40 to 60 °C (Remote Type Converter)
Ambient Humidity : 0 to 100 % RH
Maximum Working Pressure : 16 MPa (DY015 to DY200)
5 MPa (DY250 and DY300)
Coating of Enclosure : Epoxy resin coating or Polyurethane resin coating.
Electrical Connection : ANSI 1/2NPT female
FM Intrinsically safe Approval (Note 1)

Type of Protection : Intrinsically Safe for Class I, II, III, DIV.1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G, T4,
and Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T4
Nonincendive for Class I, II, Div.2, Groups A, B, C, D, F and G, Class III, DIV.1, T4,
and Class I, Zone 2, Groups IIC, T4
Ambient Temperature : –29 to +60 °C (Integral Type Flowmeter) FS1
–29 to +80 °C (Remote Type Flowmeter)
–40 to +60 °C (Remote Type Converter)
Ambient Humidity : 0 to 100 % RH (No condensation)
Indoors and Outdoors : NEMA TYPE 4X
Electrical Parameter : Vmax=30 Vdc, Imax=165 mAdc, Pi=0.9 W, Ci=12 nF, Li=0.15 mH
Electrical Connection : ANSI 1/2NPT female
FM Intrinsically Safe Approval (Note 2)
Type of Protection : Intrinsically Safe for Class I, II, III, DIV.1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and
G, T4, and Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T4
Nonincendive for Class I, II, Div.2, Groups A, B, C, D, F and G, Class III,
DIV.1, T4
Ambient Temperature : –29 to +60 °C (Integral Type Flowmeter)
–29 to +80 °C (Remote Type Flowmeter) FS15
–40 to +60 °C (Remote Type Converter)
Ambient Humidity : 0 to 100 % RH (No condensation)
Indoors and Outdoors : NEMA TYPE 4X
Electrical Parameters : Intrinsically Safe
[Entity] Vmax=24 V, Imax=250 mA, Pi=1.2 W, Ci=1.7 6nF, Li=0
[FISCO] Vmax=17.5 V, Imax=380 mA, Pi=5.32 W, Ci=1.76 nF, Li=0
Nonincendive
Vmax=32 V, Ci=1.76 nF, Li=0
Electrical Connection : ANSI 1/2NPT female
DYF Tab-05-01.EPS
(Note 1) For intrinsically safe approval, use the barrier certified by the testing laboratories (BARD-400 is not applicable).
(Note 2) Please refer also to GS 01F06F01-01E for Foundation Fieldbus Communication Type

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-10
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9.4.3 OPTION MULTI-VARIABLE (BUILD IN TEMPERATURE SENSOR) TYPE (/MV) (Note 1)


This options is the same as standard specification except the following items.

Multi-variable Type Standard Type

Size Wafer Type 25 mm to 100 mm 15 mm to 100 mm


Flange Type 25 mm to 200 mm 15 mm to 200 mm
Temperature Function Display indication Temperature, Mass Flow, Volumetric Flow, Normalized Volumetric Flow
and output
Fluid Liquid, Gas Liquid, Gas
Saturated Steam
Saturated Steam Superheated Steam Gas Liquid Saturated Steam
Superheated
Steam Superheated Steam
Temperature Range –29 to 260 °C 100 to 260 °C 100 to 260 °C –29 to 260 °C –29 to 260 °C –29 to 260 °C
Accuracy Mass
Refer to Table 3
(Note 2) Flow
±0.5 % ±1 % ±1 % ±0.5 °C
Temperature OF RATE OF RATE (Less than 100°C) (Less than 100 °C)
±1 % OF RATE ±0.5 % OF RATE
(100 °C or more) (100 °C or more)
Temperature Response 60 s
(50 % response) (Churning Underwater)
Mass Flow Calculation Density Calculation Density Calculation Temp.-Pressure Density change
Method (Constant pressure is Correction Calculation
(Note 3)
assumed) (Constant pressure is
assumed) (Note 6)
(Note 4)
(Note 5)
Output Current Output Temperature, Mass Flow, Volumetric Flow, Normalized Volumetric Flow (Note 7) Only for Flow Rate
Pulse Output Mass Units , Volumertric Units, Normalized Volumetric Units Only for Flow Rate
Alarm Output Standard Alarm1Error of Thermometer etc. Only for Standard
Status Output Only for Flow Switch Flow Switch
Display Upper Line Select from Flow Rate (%,Engineering Unit) or Temperature (%) (Note 8) Only for Flow Rate
Lower Line Select from Total Rate or Temperature ( C, F) (Note 9) Only for Total Rate
Remote Type Flow Converter : Select DYA-xxx /MV
Signal Cable : Select DYC-xxx /MV (Note 10)
T-09

(Note 1) When /MV is selected /HT, /LT is not available.


(Note 2) For detailed accuracy, see “SIZING”. Measurement temperature is changed by the heat-insulation method of piping
and piping method. Refer to “REMARKS ON INSTALLATION” about heat-insulation.In case of the Mass Flow
measurement of saturated steam and superheated steam, it is necessary to make a heat-insulation.
(Note 3) Mass Flow rate is calculated from density values by temperature measurment using saturated steam table.
(Note 4) Mass Flow rate is calculated from density values to temperature measured by using steam table. In order to measure
superheated steam, it is necessary to make constant pressure value.A pressure value which is indicated by order
sheet is used.
(Note 5) In order to measure gas, Pressure-Temperature correction is carried out. It is necessary to make constant pressure value.
In addition to pressure values at operational condition, temperature and pressure value at standard condition is used,
which is indicated by order sheet.
(Note 6) In order to measure mass flow rate of liquid applications, the density at normal condition is used, and if fluid
temperature deviates from normal temperature, density value is calculated by 2 dimensional equation. In this case,
temperature coefficient should be prepared by user’s side.
(Note 7) Default setting is Flow rate. It is necessary to change the parameter of output in case of setting temperature output.
(Note 8) In case of indicating the temperature %, the display indicate not only “%” but also “t” . ( “t” is the means of
temperature)
(Note 9) Default setting is “temperature” but “Total “ is setup when ordering the Total Rate.
(Note 10) In case of Multi variable (/MV), it is necessary to setup the parameter of Cable Length.

9-11 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9.4.4 OPTION REDUCED BORE TYPE (/R1, /R2) (Note 1)


This option is the same as standard specification except the following items.

Reduced bore type (Option Code: /R1, /R2)

Model Code (Note 2) Flange piping size R1 Detector size R2 Detector size [Pressure Loss]
(A) (inner dia.) (B) (inner dia.) (B) R1: about 15% increases to standard type.
R2: about 28% increases to standard type.
DY025 15 (14.6) (mm) (Note 3)
see P.16
A B DY040 25 (25.7) (mm) 15 (14.6) (mm) (Note 3)

DY050 40 (39.7) (mm) 25 (25.7) (mm)

DY080 50 (51.1) (mm) 40 (39.7) (mm)

DY100 80 (71) (mm) 50 (51.1) (mm)

DY150 100 (93.8) (mm) 80 (71) (mm)

DY200 150 (138.8) (mm) 100 (93.8) (mm)


Refer to Table 5.
Measurable minimum Liquid, Gas, Steam
flow velocity
Refer to Table 6.
Range of measurable Liquid, Gas, Steam
flow velocity

(Note 1) For detailed accuracy, see “SIZING”. Not available for /LT. T10-1.EPS
Not available for /SF1, /SS1
(Note 2) Flange type only: ANSI150,300 (BA1,BA2,BS1,BS2)
MS Code [*] of “DY***-” means flange piping size.
(Note 3) High process temperature version (/HT) and Multi-variable type (/MV) for DY025/R1 and DY040/R2 are not available.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-12
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Table 3 N/A

Flange facing
Table 4 Test Pressure Value Standard Opt. /ASF
r [mm] 1,8 0,8

a
Flange Rating Pressure
a [mm/U] 0,5 0,35 ... 0,45
ANSI Class 150 2.9 MPa {29 bar} b [Ra] 3,2 ... 6,3 3,2 ... 6,3

b
ANSI Class 300 7.5 MPa {75 bar} c [mm] 0,017 0,025
r
ANSI Class 600 14.9 MPa {149 bar}
ANSI Class 900 22.3 MPa {223 bar}

1
PN 10 1.5 MPa {15 bar}
PN 16 2.4 MPa {24 bar}

PN 25 3.75 MPa {37.5 bar}


PN 40 6 MPa {60 bar} c
PN 64 9.6 MPa {96 bar}
Figure 6 Finish of ANSI Flange Faces
PN 100 15 MPa {150 bar}
PN 160 24 MPa {240 bar}
DYF Tab-09

+85
Ambient temperature (˚C)

Operating range
+60

-29
-29 +100 +200 +300 +450
Fluid temperature (˚C) DYF Fig-04

Figure 4 Fluid temperature range of high process


temperature version
Ambient temperature (˚C)

0
Operating range
–20
–29

–50

–196 –100 –29 0 +100


Fluid temperature (˚C) DYF Fig-05

Figure 5 Fluid temperature range of cryogenic


version

9-13 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9.5 Sizing
The following items are the basic specifications.
In case of the definite sizing, it is necessary to check by
the sizing software.
Measurable minimum flow velocity
Table 5 Relationship between Minimum Velocity and
Density (In case of “Gas, Steam”, Use the
Large of the Two Values)

Liquid GAS, Steam

General High General High


Model Type, Process Type, Process
Code Cryogenic Temperature Cryogenic Temperature
Type Version Type version
(unit: m/s) (unit: m/s) (unit: m/s) (unit: m/s)

DY015 DY025-/R1 250 /ρ –– 80/ρ or 3 ––

DY025 DY040-/R1 122.5/ρ 490/ρ 45/ρ or 2 125/ρ or 2

DY040 DY050-/R1 90/ρ 302.5/ρ 31.3/ρ or 2 90.3/ρ or 2

DY050 DY080-/R1 90/ρ 160/ρ 31.3/ρ or 2 61.3/ρ or 2

DY080 DY100-/R1 90/ρ 160/ρ 31.3/ρ or 2 61.3/ρ or 2

DY100 DY150-/R1 90/ρ 160/ρ 31.3/ρ or 2 61.3/ρ or 2

DY150 DY200-/R1 90/ρ 160/ρ 31.3/ρ or 3 61.3/ρ or 3

DY200 –– 122.5/ρ 202.5/ρ 45/ρ or 3 80/ρ or 3

DY250 –– 160/ρ –– 61.3/ρ or 3 ––

DY300 –– 160/ρ –– 61.3/ρ or 3 ––


r : Density at operating conditions (kg/m3) DYF Tab-10
Liquid density is 400 up to 2000 kg/m3

Guaranteed accuracy at minimum flow velocity


Table 6 Range of Measurable flow velocity Table 7 Range of Guaranteed Accuracy Flow Velocity
Maximum Maximum
flow flow
Fluid Model Code Minimum flow velocity velocity Fluid Model Code Minimum flow velocity velocity
(Note) (Note)
“flow velocity obtained from “flow velocity obtained from
DY025-/ DY040-/ Table 5” or “flow velocity at Table 5” or
DY015 R1 R2 Reynolds number of 5000”, DY025- DY040- “flow velocity at Reynolds
Liquid up to up to up to whichever is greater. 10 m/s DY015 /R1 /R2 number of 20000”, whichever
DY300 DY200-/ DY200-/ For liquid Reynolds up to up to up to is greater.
R1 R2 number of 5000: See P. DY100 DY150- DY200- For liquid Reynolds number
9-16 “Calculation formula”. /R1 /R2 of 20000: The value is four
“flow velocity obtained from times velocity value in P. 9-16
Table 5” or “flow velocity at Liquid “Calculation formula”. 10 m/s
DY025-/ DY040-/ “flow velocity obtained from
DY015 Reynolds number of 5000”,
R1 R2 Table 5” or
Gas, whichever is greater.
up to up to up to 80 m/s “flow velocity at Reynolds
Steam
DY300 DY200-/ DY200-/ For Gas and steam DY150 number of 40000”, whichever
Reynolds number of 5000: DY200- —
R1 R2 up to is greater.
See P. 9-16 “Calculation /R1
DY300 For liquid Reynolds number
formula”. of 40000: The value is eight
DYF Tab-11
times velocity value in P. 9-16
When the flow velocity is lower than minimum, both the analog “Calculation formula”.
output and the pulse output is displayed as zero “0”.
(Note) A span setting is available up to 1.5 times of the maximum “flow velocity obtained
flow velocity. fromTable 5” or
DY025- DY040- “flow velocity at Reynolds
DY015 /R1 /R2 number of 20000”,
up to up to up to whichever is greater.
DY100 DY150- DY200- For gas and steam
/R1 /R2 Reynolds number of 20000:
See P. 9-16 “Calculation
Gas, formula”.
80 m/s
Steam “flow velocity obtained
fromTable 5” or
“flow velocity at Reynolds
DY150 number of 40000”,
DY200-
up to — whichever is greater.
/R1
DY300 For gas and steam
Reynolds number of 40000
See P. 9-16 “Calculation
formula”.
DYFTab-12

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-14
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Detailed Accuracy (for Table 9.5.3 Range of Guaranteed Accurancy Flow Velocity.)
Volumetric flow rate at operation condition

Model General Type Multi-Variable Type (/MV) Reduced Bore Type (/R1) Reduced Bore Type (/R2)
Code
DY015 1.0 % of Reading (20000 ≤ Re)
DY025
±1.0 % of Reading ±1.0 % of Reading
DY040
(20000 ≤ Re < D × 103) (20000 ≤ Re < D × 103)
DY050 ±1.0 % of Reading (20000 ≤ Re)
±0.75 ≤ of Reading ±0.75 ≤ of Reading
Liquid DY080 ±1.0 % of Reading (20000 ≤ Re)
(D × 103 ≤ Re ) (D × 103 ≤ Re )
DY100
DY150 ±1.0% of Reading
DY200 ±1.0 % of Reading (40000 ≤ Re) ±1.0 % of Reading (40000 ≤ Re)
DY250 (40000 ≤ Re)
DY300
DY015
DY025
DY040
±1.0 % of Reading ±1.0 % of Reading ±1.0 % of Reading
DY050
(Velocity 35 m/s or less) (Velocity 35 m/s or less) (Velocity 35 m/s or less) ±1.0 % of Reading
Gas, DY080
±1.5 % of Reading ±1.5 % of Reading ±1.5 % of Reading (Velocity 35 m/s or less)
Steam DY100
(Velocity 35 m/s up to 80 m/s) (Velocity 35 m/s up to 80 m/s) (Velocity 35 m/s up to 80 m/s) ±1.5 % of Reading
DY150
(Velocity 35 m/s up to 80 m/s)
DY200
DY250
DY300
D : Inner diameter of digitalYEWFLO detector (mm) DYF Tab-13

Re: Reynolds number (non unit)


Note: This table shows the accuracy of pulse output. In case of analog output, add up ±0.1 % of full scale to the values mentioned above.

Mass flow or Volumetric flow rate at Normal/Standard condition:


for Multi-Variable Type and combination of Multi-Variable Type and Reduced Bore Type
Model Multi-VariableType (/MV) Multi-VariableType (/MV) / Multi-VariableType (/MV) /
Code Reduced Bore Type (/R1) Reduced Bore Type (/R2)
DY025
DY040 ±2.0 % of Reading (20000 ≤ Re < D × 103)
DY050
±1.5 % of Reading (D × 103 ≤ Re ) ±2.0 % of Reading (20000 ≤ Re)
Liquid DY080
DY100 ±2.0 % of Reading (20000 ≤ Re)

DY150
±2.0 % of Reading (40000 ≤ Re)
DY200 ±2.0 % of Reading (40000 ≤ Re)
DY025
DY040
Gas, DY050 ±2.0 % of Reading (Velocity 35 m/s or less) ±2.0 % of Reading (Velocity 35 m/s or less)
Steam DY080 ±2.0 % of Reading (Velocity 35 m/s or less)
± 2.5 % of Reading (Velocity 35 m/s up to 80 ± 2.5 % of Reading (Velocity 35 m/s up to 80
DY100
m/s) m/s) ± 2.5 % of Reading (Velocity 35 m/s up to 80
DY150
m/s)
DY200
D : Inner diameter of digitalYEWFLO detector (mm) DYF Tab-13-b
Re: Reynolds number (non unit)

Note: This table shows the accuracy of pulse output. In case of analog output, add up ±0.1% of full scale to the values mentioned above.

9-15 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Calculation formula
How to calculate volume flow rate at operating
conditions.
υ x D2
• Qf = 3600 x υ x S or Qf =
354
How to calculate the velocity of a Reynolds number.
•υ=5xν/D (Reynolds number of 5000)
• υ = 20 x ν / D (Reynolds number of 20000)
• υ = 40 x ν / D (Reynolds number of 40000)

however
354 x 10 3 x Qf
• Re = ········· (1)
νxD
µ
• ν = __ x 10 3 ················· (2)
ρf

Qf : Volume flow rate at operating conditions (m3/h)


D : Inner diameter of YEWFLO (mm)
S : Cross section of YEWFLO (m2)
υ : Flow velocity (m/s)
Re : Reynolds number (none unit)
ρf : Density at operating conditions (kg/m3)
µ : Viscosity at operating conditions (mPa·s{cP})
ν : Kinematic viscosity at operating conditions (10-6m2/s{cSt})

Typical fluid example


Table 8 Range of Measurable Water Flow Rate
(At standard condition of 15°C, ρ = 1000 kg/m3)
Range of Guaranteed
Model Code Measurable Flow Rate
Accuracy Flow
in m3/h
Rate in m3/h

DY015 DY025-/R1 DY040-/R2 0.30 up to 6 0.94 up to 6

DY025 DY040-/R1 DY050-/R2 0.65 up to 18 1.7 up to 18

DY040 DY050-/R1 DY080-/R2 1.3 up to 44 2.6 up to 44

DY050 DY080-/R1 DY100-/R2 2.2 up to 73 3.3 up to 73

DY080 DY100-/R1 DY150-/R2 4.3 up to 142 4.6 up to 142

DY100 DY150-/R1 DY200-/R2 7.5 up to 248 7.5 up to 248

DY150 DY200-/R1 — 17 up to 544 18 up to 544

DY200 — — 34 up to 973 34 up to 973

DY250 — — 60 up to 1506 60 up to 1506

DY300 — — 86 up to 2156 86 up to 2156

DYF Tab-14-b

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-16
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Table 9 Range of Measurable Air Flow Rate at Selected Process Pressures

Flow Minimum and Maximum Measurable Flow Rate in Nm3/h


Model Code Rate
Limits 0 MPa 0.1 MPa 0.2 MPa 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 0.8 MPa 1 MPa 1.5 MPa 2 MPa 2.5 MPa

DY025 DY040 min. 4.8(11.1) 6.7(11.1) 8.2(11.1) 10.5(11.1) 12.5 16.1 19.7 28.6 37.5 46.4
DY015 -/R1 -/R2 max. 48.2 95.8 143 239 334 429 524 762 1000 1238

DY040 DY050 min. 11.0(19.5) 15.5(19.5) 19.0(19.5) 24.5 29.0 33.3 40.6 59.0 77.5 95.9
DY025 -/R1 -/R2 max. 149 297 444 739 1034 1329 1624 2361 3098 3836

DY050 DY080 min. 21.8(30.0) 30.8 37.8 48.7 61.6 79.2 97 149 184 229
DY040
-/R1 -/R2
max. 356 708 1060 1764 2468 3171 3875 5634 7394 9153

DY080 DY100 min. 36.2(38.7) 51 62.4 80.5 102 131 161 233 306 379
DY050 -/R1 -/R2 max. 591 1174 1757 2922 4088 5254 6420 9335 12249 15164

DY100 DY150 min. 70.1 98.4 120 155 197 254 310 451 591 732
DY080
-/R1 -/R2 max. 1140 2266 3391 5642 7892 10143 12394 18021 23648 29274

DY150 DY200 min. 122 172 211 272 334 442 540 786 1031 1277
DY100
-/R1 -/R2 max. 1990 3954 5919 9847 13775 17703 21632 31453 41274 51095

DY200 min. 268 377 485 808 1131 1453 1776 2583 3389 4196
DY150 —
-/R1 max. 4358 8659 12960 21559 30163 38765 47365 68867 90373 111875
min. 575 809 990 1445 2202 2599 3175 4617 6059 7501
DY200 — —
max. 7792 15482 23172 38549 53933 69313 84693 123138 161591 200046
min. 1037 1461 1788 2306 3127 4019 4911 7140 9370 11600
DY250 — —
max. 12049 23939 35833 59611 83400 107181 130968 190418 249881 309334
min. 1485 2093 2561 3303 4479 5756 7033 10226 13419 16612
DY300 — —
max. 17256 34286 51317 85370 119441 153499 187556 272699 357856 443017
DYF Tab-15
(1) At standard conditions STP (0 °C, 1 atm = 1.013 bar abs).
(2) Pressure listed is at process temperature of 0 °C.
(3) Maximum flow rate is the lower of 80 m/s.
(4) Minimum values are determined from Table 6. The values in parenthesis show the minimum linear flow rates (Re = 20,000 or 40,000)
when they are higher than the minimum measurable flow rate.

Table 10 Range of Measurable Saturated Steam Flow Rate at Selected Process Pressures

Model Code Flow Minimum and Maximum Measurable Flow Rate in kg/h
Rate
Limits 0.1 MPa 0.2 MPa 0.4 MPa 0.6MPa 0.8 MPa 1 MPa 1.5 MPa 2 MPa 2.5 MPa 3 MPa
DY015 DY025 DY040 min. 5.8(10.7) 7.0(11.1) 8.8(11.6) 10.4(12.1) 11.6(12.3) 12.8 15.3 19.1 23.6 28.1
-/R1 -/R2
max. 55.8 80 129 177 225 272 390 508 628 748
DY025 DY040 DY050 min. 13.4(18.9) 16.2(20.0) 20.5 24.1 27.1 30 36 41 49 58
-/R1 -/R2
max. 169.7 247.7 400 548 696 843 1209 1575 1945 2318
DY040 DY050 DY080 min. 26.5(29.2) 32 40.6 47.7 53.8 59 72 93 116 138
-/R1 -/R2
max. 405 591 954 1310 1662 2012 2884 3759 4640 5532
DY050 DY080 DY100 min. 44.0 53 67.3 79 89 98 119 156 192 229
-/R1 -/R2
max. 671 979 1580 2170 2753 3333 4778 6228 7688 9166
DY080 DY100 DY150 min. 84.9 103 130 152 171 189 231 300 371 442
-/R1 -/R2
max. 1295 1891 3050 4188 5314 6435 9224 12024 14842 17694
DY100 DY150 DY200 min. 148 179 227 267 300 330 402 524 647 772
-/R1 -/R2
max. 2261 3300 5326 7310 9276 11232 16102 20986 25907 30883
DY150
DY200 — min. 324 392 498 600 761 922 1322 1723 2127 2536
-/R1
max. 4950 7226 11661 16010 20315 24595 35258 45953 56729 67624
DY200 min. 697 841 1068 1252 1410 1649 2364 3081 3803 4534
— —
max. 8851 12918 20850 28627 36325 43976 63043 82165 101433 120913
DY250 min. 1256 1518 1929 2260 2546 2801 3655 4764 5882 7011
— —
max. 13687 19977 32243 44268 56172 68005 97489 127058 156854 186978
DY300 min.
— 1799 2174 2762 3236 3646 4012 5235 6823 8423 10041

max. 19602 28609 46175 63397 80445 97390 139614 181960 224633 267772
DYF Tab-16
(1) Maximum flow rate is the lower of 80 m/s.
(3) Minimum values are determined from Table 6. The values in parenthesis show the minimum linear flow rates (Re = 20,000 or 40,000)
when they are higher than the minimum measurable flow rate.

9-17 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Reference 2. Obtain by using equation (3). The flow velocity


Table 11 Inner Diameter and Nominal value when the flow rate is 10 m3/h is given by:
Inner Nominal Nominal Pulse Rate υ = 354 x Qf / D2 = 354 x 10 / 25.72
Model Code Diameter K-Factor = 5.4 m/s
mm Pulse/L Hz/m/s Hz/m3/h
Therefore, substitute this value in equation (3):
DY015 DY025-/R1 DY040-/R2 14.6 376 62.7 104
DY025 DY040-/R1 DY050-/R2 25.7 65.6 35.5 19.1 ∆P = 124 x 10-5 x 992 x 5.42
= 35.3 kPa
DY040 DY050-/R1 DY080-/R2 39.7 18.7 23.1 5.19

DY050 DY080-/R1 DY100-/R2 51.1 8.95 18.3 2.49 Calculation of pressure loss for reduced bore type
DY080 DY100-/R1 DY150-/R2 71.0 3.33 13.2 0.925 (Option code: /R2)
DY100 DY150-/R1 DY200-/R2 93.8 1.43 9.88 0.397 obtained from the following equations.
DY150 DY200-/R1 — 138.8 0.441 6.67 0.123
∆P = 138 x 10-5 x ρf x υ2 ········· (5)
or
∆P = 173 x ρf x Q f ··············· (6)
DY200 — — 185.6 0.185 5.00 0.0514 2

DY250 — — 230.8 0.0966 4.04 0.0268 D 4

DY300 — — 276.2 0.0563 3.37 0.0156 (Example)


DYF Tab-14
DY050-/R2, hot water: 50 °C, flowrate: 15 m3/h
1. Since the density of water at 50 °C is 992 kg/cm3,
Pressure Loss substitute this value in equation (6):
Calculation of pressure loss for general type ∆P = 173 x 992 x 152 / 25.74
obtained from the following equations. = 88.5 kPa
∆P = 108 x 10-5 x ρf x υ2 ········· (1)
2. Obtain by using equation (5). The flow velocity
or
when the flow rate is 15m3/h is given by:
∆P = 135 x ρf x Q f ··············· (2)
2

D 4 354 x 15
υ = 354 x Q f / D2 = 2 = 8.0 m/s
where, 25.7
∆P : Pressure loss (kPa) Therefore, substitute this value in equation (5):
ρf : Density at operating condition (kg/m3 )
∆P = 138 x 10-5 x 992 x 8.02
υ : Flow velocity (m/s)
= 88.5 kPa
Qf : Actual flow rate (m3/h)
D : Internal Diameter of detector (mm) Cavitation
(Minimum Back Pressure, Liquid service only):
(Example) Cavitation occurs when the flow line pressure is low
DY050, hot water: 80 °C, flowrate: 30 m3/h and flow velocity is high during fluid measurement,
1. Since the density of water at 80 °C is 972 kg/m3, preventing correct measurement of flow rate. The
substitute this value in equation (2): optimum line pressure can be obtained from the
∆P = 135 x 972 x 302 / 51.14 following equation.
= 17.3 kPa P = 2.7 · ∆P + 1.3 · Po ··············· (5)

2. Obtain the pressure loss using equation (1). The Where,


flow velocity when the flow rate is 30 m3/h is given P : Line pressure, 2 to 7 times as large as internal
by: diameter on downstream of flowmeter body
surface. (kPa absolute).
354 x 30
υ = 354 x Q f / D2 = 2 = 4.07 m/s ∆P : Pressure loss (kPa).
51.1 Refer to the item above.
Therefore, substitute this value in equation (1): Po : Saturation liquid vapor pressure at operating
∆P = 108 x 10-5 x 972 x 4.072 temperature (kPa absolute).
= 17.3 kPa
(Example) Confirmation of presence of cavitation
Calculation of pressure loss for reduced bore type Suppose that the line pressure is 120 kPa abs and the
(Option code: /R1) flow rate scale is 0 to 30 m3/h. It is only necessary to
obtained from the following equations. confirm the pressure at the maximum flow rate ;
∆P = 124 x 10-5 x ρf x υ2 ········· (3) therefore, the saturated steam pressure of water at 80°C
or is as follows from the table of saturated steam
∆P = 155 x ρf x Qf2 / D4 ········ (4) pressures:
(Example) Po = 47.4 kPa abs
DY040-/R1, hot water: 50 deg C flowrate: 10 m3/h Therefore, substitute this value in equation (5):
P = 2.7 3 17.3 + 1.3 3 47.4
1. Since the density of water at 50 deg C is
= 108.3 kPa abs
992 kg/cm3, substitute this value in equation (4):
Since the operating pressure of 120 kPa abs is higher
∆P = 155 x 992 x 102 / 25.74
than 108.3 kPa abs, no cavitation occurs.
= 35.3 kPa

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-18
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9.6 REMARKS ON INSTALLATION Adjacent pipes


The process pipeline inner diameter should be larger
Piping support than the digitalYEWFLO inner diameter.
Typical vibration immunity level is 1G for normal piping Use the following adjacent pipe.
condition. Piping support should be fixed in case of Model Code DY015 up to DY050: Sch 40 or less.
over 1G vibration level. DY025-/R1 up to DY080-/R1
DY040-/R2 up to DY100-/R2
Installation direction Model Code DY080 up to DY300: Sch 80 or less.
If a pipe is always filled with liquids, the pipe can be DY100-/R1 up to DY200-/R1
installed vertically or at inclined angle DY150-/R2 up to DY200-/R2

Straight pipe length


*D: piping diameter
*K-factor may be influenced about 0.5 % in case that
straight pipe length of upstream is less than values
below.

Description Figure
digitalYEWFLO
Reducer pipe: Flow
Ensure the upstream straight pipe length to be 5D or more, and the
downstream straight pipe length to be 5D or more for per reducer
pipe.
5D or more
Reducer
5D or more

Expander pipe: digitalYEWFLO


Ensure the upstream straight pipe length to be 10D or more, and Flow

the downstream straight pipe length to be 5D or more for per


expander pipe.
10D or more
Expander
5D or more

Bent pipe and straight pipe length: 1. digitalYEWFLO


1. Single bent pipe Flow

10D or more 5D or more

digitalYEWFLO
Flow
2. Double bent pipe; coplanar 2.

10D or more 5D or more

digitalYEWFLO
Flow
3. Double bent pipe; non coplanar 3.

20D or more 5D or more

digitalYEWFLO
Valve position and straight pipe length:
■ Install the valve on the downstream side of the flowmeter.
The upstream straight pipe length dependent on the element
Refer to each element above for
located on the upstream such as reducer/expander, bent and straight pipe run.
etc., refer to description as above. Keep 5D or more for
downstream straight pipe length.
Flow Valve digitalYEWFLO
■ In case the valve has to be installed on the upstream of the
flowmeter, ensure the upstream straight pipe length to be 20D
or more, and the downstream straight pipe length be 5D or more.
20D or more 5D or more

Fluid vibration:
For a gas line which uses a piston-type or roots-type blower compressor
or a high-pressure liquid line (about 1MPa or more) which uses
piston-type or plunger-type pump, fluid vibrations may be produced.
In these case, install valve on the upstream side of digitalYEWFLO.
For inevitable fluid vibration, put a vibration damping device such as
throttling plate or expansion section in the upstream side of
digitalYEWFLO.

F01.01.EPS

9-19 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Description Figure
Piston-type or plunger pump:
Install the accumulator on the upstream side of digitalYEWFLO
digitalYEWFLO
to reduce fluid vibrations.

Valve positon (T-type piping exist):


When pulsation caused by a T-type piping exist, install the valve on the Relocating
upstream of the flowmeter.
Example: As shown in the figure, when the valve V1 is turned off, the Flow Valve (Off)
fluid flow through B as to meter A the flow is zero. But due to the
pulsating pressure is detected, the meter´s zero point becomes
B
fluctuating. To avoid this, change the valve V1 location to V1'.
V1’ V1

Pressure and Temperature Taps:


Pressure tap outlet: install this tap between 2D and 7D on the
Pressure tap
downstream side of a flowmeter. Temperature tap
Temperature tap outlet: install this on the downstream side 1D to 2D
away from a pressure tap. Upstream

Flow
downstream
2 to 7D 1 to 2D

Mounting Gasket:
Avoid mounting gaskets which protrude into the pipe line. This may
cause inaccurate readings.
Use the gasket with bolt holes, even if digitalYEWFLO is the wafer type.
When using a spiral gasket(without bolt holes), confirm the size with the
gasket -manufacturer, as standard items may not be used for certain
flange ratings.
Pipeline Flange
Pipeline

No good

Heat-Insulation:
When an integral-type flowmeter or a remote type detector is Bracket
installed and the pipe carrying high-temperature fluids is
heat-insulated, do not wrap adiabatic materials around the Heat-Insulator
installation bracket of the converter.

Flushing of the pipe line: digitalYEWFLO


Flush and clean scale, incrustation and sludge on the inside of
pipe for newly installed pipe line and repaired pipe line before
the operation. For flushing, the flow should flow through
bypass-piping to avoid damaging the flowmeter. If there is no
bypass-piping, install short pipe instead of the flowmeter.

Short pipe

F01.02.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-20
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The wiring example for simultaneous analog and pulse and alarm, status output.

Connection Description
Analog Output digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal
Distributor
In this case, communication + 24V DC
is possible (up to a distance SUPPLY +
of 2 km when a CEV cable is – 250Ω
used.) –
PULSE +

Pulse Output digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal Use the Three-wire shielded cable.
Shielded Cable
In this case,
no communication is SUPPLY + E
possible.

*1
PULSE + *2 R Electric counter

digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal Use the Three-wire shielded cable.


Status Output Shielded Cable
Alarm Output E
SUPPLY + Relay
In this case,
no communication is

possible. PULSE +
Magnetic
valve
External Power supply
30 V DC, 120 mA max
(Contact Rating)
AC power supply

When analog and pulse output are used, the length of communication line is subjected to wiring conditions. Refer to
Simultaneous example 1 to 3. If the communication carries out from amplifier, no need to consider wiring conditions.
Analog Distributor (or communication medium: ex. EP card)
-Pulse Output Shielded Cable For the shielded cables in this example of
24 V DC
Example 1 + flowmeter installation, use two-wire separately
SUPPLY shielded cables.
In this case, communica-
tion is possible (up to a – *2 R 250Ω
distance of 2 km when a E(10.5 to 30 V DC) This supply voltage requires a power source
CEV cable is used).
PULSE + Counting input with a maximum output current of no less than
Common E/R.
digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal Electric counter *1(or communication medium: ex. EP card)
For the shielded cables in this
Example 2 Recorder or
example of flowmeter installation,
In this case, communica- Shielded Cable other instrument
use two-wire separately shielded
tion is possible (up to a 250 Ω cables.
distance of 200 m when a
SUPPLY + *2
E(16.4 to 30 V DC)
This supply voltage requires a power
CEV cable is used) and R
R = 1 kΩ).
– Counting input source with a maximum output current
of no less than E/R+25mA.
PULSE + Common
The supply voltage requires output
Electric counter impedance no more than 1/1000 of R
digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal *1 (load resistance).
Recorder or
other instrument
Example 3 250 Ω
In this case, no communi-
+ E(16.4 to 30 V DC) This supply voltage requires
cation is possible (when SUPPLY
shielded cable is not used). R*2 a power source with a
– Counting input maximum output current of
no less than E/R+25 mA.
PULSE + Common

Electric counter *1
digitalYEWFLO Electrical Terminal

The load resistance of pulse output should be used to 1 kΩ, 2 W.


The range of load If no translation of the pulse output is possible by the cable length or the frequency of the pluse output,
resistance R for the load resistance should be selected by calculation as shown below.
E (V) 0.1
the pulse output. ≤ R (kΩ) ≤ Example of CEV cable capacitance = 0.1µF/km
120 C ( µF ) × f ( kHz )
Where
E2 (V) E = Supply voltage (V) C = Cable capacitance (µF)
P (mW) =
R(kΩ) f = Frequency of pulse output (kHz) P = Power ratio of the load resistance
R= Value of load resistance (kΩ) (mW)
*1: To avoid the influence of external noise, use an electric counter which fits to the pulse frequency. T004.02.EPS

*2: Resistor is not necessary in case of an electric counter which can receive contact pulse signal directly.

9-21 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9.7 External Dimensions


Wafer type (DY015 up to DY100)
Unit: mm
(approx. inch)

74 (2.91)
WITH INDICA
TOR
59 (2.32) 59 (2.32)
ELECTRIC
AL
4.5 (0.18) CONNECTION 125 (4.92)

EARTH
φ94 (3.70)

103.5 (4.07)

87.5 (3.44)
TERMINAL

2-φG
CLAMP
ONLY FOR KEMA

H
Explosion proof

H1
F

φD
φC

E B
L

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY015 (15mm,1/2 in) DY025 (25mm,1in)
PROCESS AD1 AD1
CONNECTION AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A
L 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76)
B 35 (1.38) 35 (1.38)
C 14.6 (0.57) 25.7 (1.01)
D 35.1 (1.38) 50.8 (2.00)
H 248 (9.76) 258 (10.16)
H1 127 (5.00) 129 (5.08)
42.7 47.1 47.1 46 56 62.9 62.9 60.1
E (1.68) (1.85) (1.85) (1.81) (2.21) (2.48) (2.48) (2.37)
21.4 23.5 23.5 23 28 31.4 31.4 30.1
F (0.84) (0.93) (0.93) (0.91) (1.10) (1.24) (1.24) (1.19)
14 14 14 13 14 17 17 13
G (0.55) (0.55) (0.55) (0.51) (0.55) (0.67) (0.67) (0.51)
WEIGHT kg 2.8 (6.17lb) 3.7 (8.16lb)

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY040 (40mm,11/2 in) DY050 (50mm,2in)
PROCESS AD1 AD1
CONNECTION AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A
L 70 (2.76) 75 (2.95)
B 35 (1.38) 37.5 (1.48)
C 39.7 (1.56) 51.1 (2.01)
D 73 (2.87) 92 (3.62)
H 276 (10.87) 307.5 (12.11)
H1 136 (5.35) 158 (6.22)
69.7 80.8 80.8 77.8 48.6
(Note 3) (1.91) 48.6
E (2.74) (3.18) (3.18) (3.06) (1.91) (Note 3)
F 34.8 40.4 40.4 38.9 (Note 3) 58.7 58.7 (Note 3)
(1.37) (1.59) (1.59) (1.53) (2.31) (2.31)
14 20 20 17 (Note 3) 17 17
G (0.55) (0.79) (0.79) (0.67) (0.67) (0.67) (Note 3)
WEIGHT kg 4.3 (9.48lb) 6.0 (13.23lb)

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY080 (80mm,3in) DY100 (100mm,4in)
PROCESS AD1 AD3 AD1 AD3
CONNECTION AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD2 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD2 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A
L 100 (3.94) 120 (4.72)
B 40 (1.57) 50 (1.97)
C 71 (2.80) 93.8 (3.69)
D 127 (5.00) 157.2 (6.19)
H 342 (13.47) 372 (14.65)
H1 175 (6.89) 190 (7.48)
64.4
(Note 3) (2.54) 64.4 61.2 61.2 72.9 76.6 82.6 68.9 72.7
E (2.54) (2.41) (2.41) (2.87) (3.02) (3.25) (2.71) (2.86)
77.7
(Note 3) (3.06) 77.7 73.9 73.9 88 92.5 99.7 83.1 87.8
F (3.06) (2.91) (2.91) (3.46) (3.64) (3.93) (3.27) (3.46)
20
(Note 3) (0.79) 20 17 17 17 20 23 17 21
G (0.79) (0.67) (0.67) (0.67) (3.06) (0.91) (0.67) (0.83)
WEIGHT kg 9.4 (20.73lb) 12.8 (28.22lb)
(Note 1) Integral weight is the same as Remote.
(Note 2) In case of with Indicator, add 0.2kg.
(Note 3) The hole is not provided.
(Note 4) The flow direction is opposite (right to left when facing onto indicator) in case of code /CRC.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-22
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Flange type (DY015 up to DY100)


Unit: mm
(approx. inch)

74(2.91)
WITH INDICATOR
59(2.32) 59(2.32)
4.5(0.18) ELECTRICAL 125(4.92)
CONNECTION

103.5(4.07)
φ94(3.70)

EARTH

87.5(3.44)
TERMINAL

CLAMP
ONLY FOR KEMA Explosion T

H
proof
N-φG

H1

φD
φC φJ

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY015 (15mm,1/2 in) DY025 (25mm,1in)
PROCESS BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1 BD5 BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1 BD5
CONNECTION BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD4 - BD6 BD7 CA4 CA5 N/A BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD4 - BD6 BD7 N/A CA4 CA5
130 160 130 140 160 150 190 150 140 140 170 190
L (5.12) (6.30) (5.12) (5.51) (6.30) (5.91) (7.48) (5.91) (5.51) (5.51) (6.69) (7.48)
C 14.6 (0.58) 25.7 (1.01)
88.9 95.3 95.3 120.7 95 105 105 95.3 120.7 108 124 124 149.4 115 140 140 124 149.4
D (3.50) (3.75) (3.75) (4.75) (3.74) (4.13) (4.13)(3.75) (4.75) (4.25) (4.88) (4.88) (5.88) (4.53) (5.51) (5.51) (4.88) (5.88)
H 275 278 278 291 278 283 283 278 291 286.5 294.5 294.5 307 290 302.5 303 294.5 307
(10.83) (10.94) (10.94) (11.46)(10.94) (11.14) (11.14)(10.94) (11.46) (11.28) (11.59) (11.59) (12.09) (11.42) (11.91)(11.93 (11.59) (12.09)
H1 127 (5.00) 129 (5.08)
T 11.2 14.2 21 28.8 16 20 20 19.9 28.8 14.2 17.5 24 34.9 18 24 24 24 34.9
(0.44) (0.56) (0.83) (1.13) (0.63)(0.79) (0.79) (0.78) (1.13) (0.56) (0.69) (0.94) (1.37) (0.71) (0.94) (0.94) (0.94) (1.37)
J 60.5 66.5 66.5 82.6 65 75 75 66.5 82.6 79.2 89 89 101.6 85 100 100 89 101.6
(2.38) (2.62) (2.62) (3.25) (2.56) (2.95) (2.95) (2.62) (3.25) (3.12) (3.50) (3.50) (4.00) (3.35) (3.93 (3.93 (3.50) (4.00)
N 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16)
G 15.7 15.7 15.7 22.4 14 14 14 15.7 22.4 15.7 19 19 25.4 14 18 18 19 25.4
(0.62) (0.62) (0.62) (0.88) (0.55) (0.55) (0.55) (0.62) (0.88) (0.62) (0.75) (0.75) (1.00) (0.55) (0.71) (0.71) (0.75) (1.00)
WEIGHT kg 4.1 4.3 4.6 6.7 4.2 5.4 5.4 4.5 6.8 6.6 7.2 7.7 11.1 6.9 9.6 9.6 7.9 11.4
lb 9.04 9.48 10.14 14.77 9.26 11.91 11.91 9.92 14.99 14.55 15.88 16.98 24.48 15.21 21.16 21.16 17.42 25.14

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY040 (40mm,11/2 in) DY050 ( 50mm, 2in)
PROCESS BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1 BD5 BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1
CONNECTION BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD4 - BD6 BD7 CA4 CA5 N/A BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD4 BD5 BD6 BD7 CA4 CA5
L 150 200 150 180 185 200 170 230 170 195 205 230
(5.91) (7.87) (5.91) (7.09) (7.28) (7.87) (6.69) (9.06) (6.69) (7.68) (8.07) (9.06)
C 39.7 (1.56) 51.1 (2.01)
127 155.4 155.4 177.8 150 170 170 155.4 177.8 152.4 165.1 165.1 215.9 165 180 195 195 165.1 215.9
D (5.00) (6.12) (6.12) (7.00) (5.91) (6.69) (6.69) (6.12) (7.00) (6.00) (6.50) (6.50) (8.50) (6.50) (7.09) (7.68) (7.68) (6.50) (8.50)
303 317 317 328.5 314.5 324.5 325 317 328.5 337.5 344 344 369.5 344 351.5 359 359 344 369.5
H (11.93) (12.48) (12.48) (12.93) (12.38) (12.78) (12.8) (12.48) (12.93) (13.29) (13.54) (13.54) (14.55) (13.54) (13.84)(14.14)(14.14)(13.54) (14.55)
H1 136 (5.35) 158 (6.22)
17.5 20.6 28.8 38.2 18 26 28 28.8 38.2 19.1 22.4 31.8 44.5 20 26 28 30 33.3 46
T (0.69) (0.81) (1.13) (1.50) (0.71) (1.02) (1.10) (1.13) (1.50) (0.75) (0.88) (1.25) (1.75) (0.79) (1.02) (1.10) (1.18) (1.31) (1.81)
98.6 114.3 114.3 124 110 125 125 114.3 124 120.7 127 127 165.1 125 135 145 145 127 165.1
J (3.88) (4.50) (4.50) (4.88) (4.33) (4.92) (4.92) (4.50) (4.88) (4.75) (5.00) (5.00) (6.50) (4.92) (5.32) (5.71) (5.71) (5.00) (6.50)
4 4 8 8 8 4 4 4 4 8 8
N (0.16) (0.16) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.16) (0.16) (0.16) (0.16) (0.31) (0.31)
15.7 22.4 22.4 28.4 18 22 22 22.4 28.4 19 19 19 25.4 18 22 26 26 19 25.4
G (0.62) (0.88) (0.88) (1.12) (0.71) (0.04) (0.04) (0.88) (1.12) (0.75) (0.75) (0.75) (1.00) (0.71) (0.87) (1.02) (1.02) (0.75) (1.00)
WEIGHT kg 8.1 9.3 11.3 16.2 8.8 12.7 12.7 11.7 16.3 11.7 13.2 14.8 26.5 11.3 14.3 15.2 15.2 15.8 26.9
lb 17.86 20.51 24.92 35.72 19.40 28.00 28.00 25.80 35.94 25.80 29.11 32.63 58.43 24.92 31.52 33.50 33.50 34.84 59.31

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY080 (80mm, 3in) DY100 (100mm, 4in)
PROCESS BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1 BD3 BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1 BD3
CONNECTION BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD2 - BD4 BD5 BD6 BD7 CA4 CA5 BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD2 - BD4 BD5 BD6 BD7 CA4 CA5
200 245 200 230 235 250 220 240 280 220 260 270 285
L (7.87) (9.65) (7.87) (9.06) (9.25) (9.84) (8.66) (9.45) (11.02) (8.66) (10.24)(10.63) (11.22)
C 71 (2.80) 93.8 (3.69)
190.5 209.6 209.6 241.3 200 200 215 230 230 209.6 241.3 228.6 254 273 292.1 220 235 250 265 265 273 292.1
D (7.50) (8.25) (8.25) (9.50) (7.87) (7.87) 8.47) (9.06) (9.06) (8.25) (9.50) (9.00) (10.00) (10.75) (11.50) (8.66) (9.25) (9.85) (10.43)(10.43)(10.75) (11.50)
374 383.5 383.5 399 378.5 378.5 386 393.5 394 383.5 399 409 420.5 430 439.5 403.5 411 418.5 426 426 430 439.5
H (14.72) (15.10) (15.10) (15.71) (14.90) (14.90) (15.2) (15.50)(15.52 (15.10) (15.71) (16.10) (16.56) (16.93) (17.30) (15.89) (16.18) (16.48)(16.78)(16.78)(16.93) (17.30)
H1 175 (6.89) 190 (7.48)
23.9 28.4 38.2 44.5 20 24 28 32 36 39.7 46 23.9 31.8 44.5 50.9 20 24 30 36 40 46 52.4
T (0.94) (1.12) (1.50) (1.75) (0.79) (0.95) (1.10) (1.26) (1.42) (1.56) (1.81) (0.94) (1.25) (1.75) (2.00) (0.79) (0.95) (1.18) (1.42) (1.57) (1.81) (2.06)
152.4 168.2 168 190.5 160 160 170 180 180 170 180 190.5 200.2 216 235 180 190 200 210 210 216 235
J (6.00) (6.62) (6.61) (7.50) (6.30) (6.30) (6.69) (7.09) (7.09) (6.69) (7.09) (7.50) (7.88) (8.50) (9.25) (7.09) (7.48) (7.88) (8.27) (8.27) (8.50) (9.25)
4 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
N (0.16) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31)
19 22.4 22.4 25.4 18 18 22 26 26 22.4 25.4 19 22.4 25.4 31.8 18 22 26 30 30 25.4 31.8
G (0.75) (0.88) (0.88) (1.00) (0.71) (0.71) (0.04) (1.02) (1.02) (0.88) (1.00) (0.75) (0.88) (1.00) (1.25) (0.71) (0.87) (1.02) (1.18) (1.18) (1.00) (1.25)
WEIGHT kg 20 23.8 25.4 35.7 19.4 20 24.1 27 26 27.1 36.3 27.4 35.9 50.8 55.9 23.2 27.4 33 39.7 39.7 52.8 56.6
lb 44.10 52.48 56.01 78.72 42.78 44.10 53.14 59.53 57.33 59.76 80.04 60.42 79.16 112.01 123.26 51.16 60.42 72.74 87.51 87.51 116.42 124.80
(Note 1) Integral weight is the same as Remote
(Note 2) In the case of with Indicator, add 0.2 kg
(Note 3) The flow direction is opposite (right to left when facing onto indicator) in case of code/ /CRC.

9-23 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Flange type (DY150 up to DY300)


Unit: mm
(approx. inch)

74(2.91)
WITH INDICATOR
59(2.32) 59(2.32)
ELECTRICAL 125(4.92)
4.5 CONNECTION
(0.18)
φ94(3.70)

103.5(4.07)
EARTH

87.5(3.44)
TERMINAL

CLAMP T
N-φG ONLY FOR KEMA Explosion
proof

H1
H

φD
φJ
φC

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY150 (150mm, 6in) DY200 (200mm, 8in)
PROCESS BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1 BD3 BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5
CONNECTION BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD2 - BD4 BD5 BD6 CA4 CA5 N/A BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 CA4 CA5 N/A N/A
270 310 336 270 325 340 310 370 386 310 375 390
L (10.63) (12.21) (13.23) (10.63) (12.80) (13.39) (12.20) (14.57) (15.20) (12.20) (14.76) (15.35)
C 138.8 (5.46) 185.6 (7.31)
279.4 317.5 356 381 285 300 345 355 356 381 342.9 381 419.1 469.9 340 340 360 375 419.1 469.9
D (11.00) (12.50) (14.02) (15.00) (11.22) (11.81) (13.53) 13.93 (14.02) (15.00) (13.50) (15.00) (16.50)) (18.50)) (13.39)) (13.39)) (14.17)) (14.76)) (16.50)) (18.50))
452 471 491 503 455 463 485 490 491 503 516 535 554 579 515 515 525 532 554 579
H (17.80) (18.54) (19.33) (19.80) (17.91) (18.23) (19.02)(19.22) (19.33) (19.80) (20.31) (21.06) (21.81) (22.80) (20.28) (20.28) (20.67) (20.94) (21.81) (22.80)
H1 209 (8.23) 241 (9.49)
25.4 36.6 54.4 62 22 28 36 44 55.7 63.6 28.4 41.1 62 69.9 24 24 30 34 63.6 71.4
T (1.00) (1.44) (2.14) (2.44) (0.87) (1.10) (1.41) (1.72) (2.19) (2.50) (1.12) (1.62) (2.44) (2.75) (0.95) (0.95) (1.18) (1.34) (2.50) (2.81)
241.3 269.7 292 317.5 240 250 280 290 292 317.5 298.5 330.2 349.3 393.7 295 295 310 320 349.3 393.7
J (9.50) (10.62) (11.50) (12.50) (9.45) (9.84) (10.98) (11.38) (11.50) (12.50) (11.75) (13.00) (13.75) (15.50) (11.61) (11.61) (12.20) (12.60) (13.75) (15.50)
8 12 12 12 8 8 8 12 12 12 8 12 12 12 8 12 12 12 12 12
N (0.31) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47) (0.31) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47) (0.31) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47)
22.4 22.4 28.4 31.8 22 26 33 33 28.4 31.8 22.4 25.4 31.8 38.1 22 22 26 30 31.8 38.1
G (0.88) (0.88) (1.12) (1.25) (0.87) (1.02) (1.19) (1.19) (1.12) (1.25) (0.88) (1.00) (1.25) (1.50) (0.87) (0.87) (1.02) (1.18) (1.25) (1.50)
WEIGHT kg 36.4 54.4 84.4 106 33.4 42.9 58.1 76.4 90 107 55.4 80.4 136 182 46.3 46.3 53.6 55.9 139 183
lb 80.26 119.95 186.10 233.73 73.65 94.59 128.07168.41 198.45 235.94 122.16 177.28 299.88 401.31 102.09 102.09 118.19 123.26 306.52 403.52

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY250 (250mm, 10in) DY300 (300mm, 12in)
PROCESS BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2
CONNECTION BS1 BS2 N/A N/A BS1 BS2 N/A N/A
370 400
L (14.57) (15.75)
C 230.8 276.2
(9.09) (10.87)
406.4 444.5 482.6 520.7
D (16.00) (17.50) (19.00) (20.50)
584 603 652 671
H (22.99) (23.74) (25.67) (26.42)
277 307
H1 (10.91) (12.09)
31.2 48.8 32.8 51.8
T (1.23) (1.92) (1.29) (2.04)
362 387.4 431.8 450.9
J (14.25) (15.25) (17.00) (17.75)
12 16 12 16
N (0.47) (0.63) (0.47) (0.63)
25.4 28.5 25.4 31.8
G (1.00) (1.12) (1.00) (1.25)
WEIGHT kg 90 125 140 178
lb 198.45 275.63 308.70 392.49
(Note 1) Integral weight is the same as Remote
(Note 2) In case of with indicator, add 0.2kg
(Note 3) The flow direction is opposite (right to left when facing onto indicator) in case of code / CRC.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-24
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

High Process Temperature Version (/HT): DY025-/HT up to DY100-/HT


Cryogenic Version (/LT): DY015-/LT up to DY100-/LT
Wafer type
Unit: mm
(approx. inch)

59(2.32) 59(2.32) ELECTRICAL


4.5(0.18) CONNECTION 125(4.92)

EARTH

103.5(4.07)
φ94(3.70)

87.5(3.44)
TERMINAL

CLAMP
ONLY FOR KEMA
Explosion proof
2-φG

H1
F

φD
φC
E B

TYPE Only for REMOTE


CODE DY015 (15mm,1/2 in) Only for /LT
PROCESS AD1
CONNECTION AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A
L 70 (2.76)
B 35 (1.38)
C 14.6 (0.57)
D 35.1 (1.38)
H 391 (15.39)
H1 270 (10.63)
E 42.7 47.1 47.1 46
(1.68) (1.85) (1.85) (1.81)
F 21.4 23.5 23.5 23
(0.84) (0.93) (0.93) (0.91)
G 14 14 14 13
(0.55) (0.55) (0.55) (0.51)
WEIGHT kg 3.2 (7.06lb)

TYPE Only for REMOTE


CODE DY025 (25mm,1in) /LT, /HT DY040 (40mm,11/2 in) /LT, /HT DY050 (50mm,2in) /LT, /HT
PROCESS AD1 AD1 AD1
CONNECTION AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A
L 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 75 (2.95)
B 35 (1.38) 35 (1.38) 37.5 (1.48)
C 25.7 (1.01) 39.7 (1.56) 51.1 (2.01)
D 50.8 (2.00) 73 (2.87) 92 (3.62)
H 401 (15.79) 419 (16.50) 450.5 (17.74)
H1 272 (10.71) 279 (10.98) 301 (11.85)
56 62.9 62.9 60.1 69.7 80.8 80.8 77.8 48.6 48.6 (Note 1)
E (2.20) (2.48) (2.48) (2.37) (2.74) (3.18) (3.18) (3.06) (Note 1) (1.91) (1.91)
F 28 31.4 31.4 30.1 34.8 40.4 40.4 38.9 (Note 1) 58.7 58.7 (Note 1)
(1.10) (1.24) (1.24) (1.19) (1.37) (1.59) (1.59) (1.53) (2.31) (2.31)
G 14 17 17 13 14 20 20 17 (Note 1) 17 17 (Note 1)
(0.55) (0.67) (0.67) (0.51) (0.55) (0.79) (0.79) (0.67) (0.67) (0.67)
WEIGHT kg 4.1 (9.04lb) 4.7 (10.36lb) 6.4 (14.11lb)

TYPE Only for REMOTE


CODE DY080 (80mm,3in) /LT, /HT DY100 (100mm,4in) /LT, /HT
PROCESS AD1 AD3 AD1 AD3
CONNECTION AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD2 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A AA1 AA2 AA4 - AD2 - AD4 N/A N/A N/A
L 100 (3.94) 120 (4.72)
B 40 (1.57) 50 (1.97)
C 71 (2.80) 93.8 (3.69)
D 127 (5.00) 157.2 (6.19)
H 485 (19.09) 515 (20.28)
H1 318 (12.52) 333 (13.11)
E 64.4
(Note 1) (2.54) 64.4 61.2 61.2 72.9 76.6 82.6 68.9 72.7
(2.54) (2.41) (2.41) (2.87) (3.02) (3.25) (2.71) (2.86)
F 77.7
(Note 1) (3.06) 77.7 73.9 73.9 88 92.5 99.7 83.1 87.8
(3.06) (2.91) (2.91) (3.46) (3.64) (3.93) (3.27) (3.46)
G 20
(Note 1) (0.79) 20 17 17 17 20 23 17 21
(0.79) (0.67) (0.67) (0.67) (0.79) (0.91) (0.67) (0.83)
WEIGHT kg 9.8 (21.61lb) 13.2 (29.11lb)
(Note 1) The hole is not provided.
(Note 2) The flow direction is opposite (right to left when facing onto indicator) in case of code / CRC.

9-25 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

High Process Temperature Version (/HT): DY025-/HT up to DY100-/HT


Cryogenic Version (/LT): DY015-/LT up to DY100-/LT
Flange type
Unit: mm
(approx. inch)

59(2.32) 59(2.32) ELECTRICAL


CONNECTION 125(4.92)
4.5(0.18)

103.5(4.07)
φ94(3.70) EARTH

87.5(3.44)
TERMINAL

CLAMP
ONLY FOR KEMA
Explosion proof

H1
H
T

N-φG

φD
φJ
φC
L

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY015 (15mm,1/2 in) Only for /L T DY025 (25mm,2 in) /LT, /HT
PROCESS BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1 BD5 BA1 BA2 BA5 BD1
BA4 BD5
CONNECTION BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD4 - BD6 BD7 CA4 CA5 N/A BS1 BS2 BS5 - BD4 - BD6 BD7
BS4 CA4 CA5 N/A
L 130 160 130 140 140 160 150 190 150 170 170 190
(5.12) (6.30) (5.12) (5.51) (5.51) (6.30) (5.91) (7.48) (5.91) (6.69) (6.69) (7.48)
C 14.6 (0.57) 25.7 (1.01)
88.9 95.3 95.3 120.7 95 105 105 95.3 120.7 108 124 124 149.4 115 140 140 124 149.4
D (3.50) (3.75) (3.75) (4.75) (3.74) (4.12) (4.12) (3.75) (4.75) (4.25) (4.88) (4.88) (5.88) (4.53) (5.49) (5.49) (4.88) (5.88)
418 421 421 434 421 426 426 421 434 430 438 438 450 433 446 446 438 450
H (16.46) (16.57) (16.57) (17.09) (16.57) (16.71)(16.71)(16.57) (17.09) (16.93) (17.24) (17.24) (17.72) (17.05)(15.50)(15.50) (17.24) (17.18)
H1 270 (10.63) 272 (10.71)
11.2 14.2 21 28.8 16 20 20 19.9 28.8 14.2 17.5 24 34.9 18 24 24 24 34.9
T (0.44) (0.56) (0.83) (1.13) (0.63) (0.78 (0.78 (0.78) (1.13) (0.56) (0.69) (0.94) (1.37) (0.71) (0.94) (0.94) (0.94) (1.37)
60.5 66.5 66.5 82.6 65 75 75 66.5 82.6 79.2 89 89 101.6 85 100 100 89 101.6
J (2.38) (2.62) (2.62) (2.25) (2.56) (2.94) (2.94) (2.62) (2.25) (3.12) (3.50) (3.50) (4.00) (3.35) (3.92) (3.92) (3.50) (4.00)
N 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16)
15.7 15.7 15.7 22.4 14 14 14 15.7 22.4 15.7 19 19 25.4 14 18 18 19 25.4
G (0.62) (0.62) (0.62) (0.88) (0.55) (0.55) (0.55) (0.62) (0.88) (0.62) (0.75) (0.75) (1.00) (0.55) (0.71) (0.71) (0.75) (1.00)
WEIGHT kg 4.5 4.7 5.0 7.1 4.6 5.8 5.8 4.9 7.2 7.0 7.6 8.1 11.5 7.3 10.0 10.0 8.3 11.8
lb 9.92 10.36 11.03 15.66 10.14 12.79 12.79 10.80 15.88 15.44 16.76 17.86 25.36 16.10 22.05 22.05 18.30 26.02

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY040 (40mm,11/2 in) /LT, /HT DY050 (50mm,2in) /LT, /HT
PROCESS BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1 BD5 BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1
CONNECTION BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD4 - BD6 BD7 CA4 CA5 N/A BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD4 BD5 BD6 BD7 CA4 CA5
L 150 200 150 180 185 200 170 230 170 195 205 230
(5.91) (7.87) (5.91) (7.06) (7.28) (7.87) (6.69) (9.06) (6.69) (7.65) (8.07) (9.06)
C 39.7 (1.56) 51.1 (2.01)
127 155.4 155.4 177.8 150 170 170 155.4 177.8 152.4 165.1 165.1 215.9 165 180 195 195 165.1 215.9
D (5.00) (6.12) (6.12) (7.00) (5.91) (6.67) (6.67) (6.12) (7.00) (6.00) (6.50) (6.50) (8.50) (6.50) (7.06) (7.65) (7.65) (6.50) (8.50)
446 460 460 472 458 468 468 460 472 481 487 487 513 487 495 502 502 487 513
H (17.56) (18.11) (18.11) (18.58) (18.03)(18.36)(18.36)(18.11) (18.58) (18.94) (19.17) (19.17) (20.20) (19.17) (19.42)(19.69)(19.69)(19.17) (20.20)
H1 279 (10.98) 301 (11.85)
17.5 20.6 28.8 38.2 18 26 26 28.8 38.2 19.1 22.4 31.8 44.5 20 26 28 28 33.3 46
T (0.69) (0.81) (1.13) (1.50) (0.71) (1.02) (1.02) (1.13) (1.50) (0.75) (0.88) (1.25) (1.75) (0.79) (1.02) (1.10) (1.10) (1.31) (1.81)
98.6 114.3 114.3 124 110 125 125 114.3 124 120.7 127 127 165.1 125 135 145 145 127 165.1
J (3.88) (4.50) (4.50) (4.88) (4.33) (4.90) (4.90) (4.50) (4.88) (4.75) (5.00) (5.00) (6.50) (4.92) (5.30) (5.69) (5.69) (5.00) (6.50)
4 4 8 8 8 4 4 4 4 8 8
N (0.16) (0.16) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.16) (0.16) (0.16) (0.16) (0.31) (0.31)
15.7 22.4 22.4 28.4 18 22 22 22.4 28.4 19 19 19 25.4 18 22 26 26 19 25.4
G (0.62) (0.88) (0.88) (1.12) (0.71) (0.86) (0.86) (0.88) (1.12) (0.75) (0.75) (0.75) (1.00) (0.71) (0.86) (1.02 (1.02 (0.75) (1.00)
WEIGHT kg 8.5 9.7 11.7 16.6 9.2 13.1 13.1 12.1 16.7 12.1 13.6 15.2 26.9 11.7 14.7 15.6 15.6 16.2 27.3
lb 18.74 21.39 25.80 36.60 20.29 28.88 28.88 26.68 36.82 26.68 29.99 33.52 59.32 25.80 32.41 34.40 34.40 35.72 60.20

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY080 (80mm,3 in) /LT, /HT DY100 (100mm,4in) /LT, /HT
PROCESS BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1 BD3 BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1 BD3
CONNECTION BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD2 - BD4 BD5 BD6 BD7 CA4 CA5 BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD2 - BD4 BD5 BD6 BD7 CA4 CA5
200 245 200 230 235 250 220 240 280 220 260 270 285
L (7.87) (9.65) (7.87) (9.06) (9.25) (9.84) (8.66) (9.45) (11.02) (8.66) (10.2) (10.63) (11.22)
C 71 (2.80) 93.8 (3.69)
190.5 209.6 209.6 241.3 200 200 215 230 230 209.6 241.3 228.6 254 273 292.1 220 235 250 265 265 273 292.1
D (7.50) (8.25) (8.25) (9.50) (7.87) (7.87) (8.53) (9.02) (9.02) (8.25) (9.50) (9.00) (10.00) (10.75) (11.50) (8.66) (9.25) (9.81) (10.40)(10.40) (10.75) (11.50)
517 527 527 542 522 522 529 537 537 527 542 552 564 573 583 547 554 562 569 569 573 583
H (20.35) (20.75) (20.75) (21.34) (20.55) (20.55) (20.75)(21.07)(21.07)(20.75) (21.34) (21.73) (22.20) (22.56) (22.95) (21.54) (21.81) (22.04)(22.32)(22.32)(22.56) (22.95)
H1 318 (12.52) 333 (13.11)
23.9 28.4 38.2 44.5 20 24 28 32 36 39.7 46 23.9 31.8 44.5 50.9 20 24 30 36 40 46 52.4
T (0.94) (1.12) (1.50) (1.75) (0.79) (0.94) (1.10) (1.25) (1.41) (1.56) (1.81) (0.94) (1.25) (1.75) (2.00) (0.79) (0.94) (1.18) (1.41)(1.57) (1.81) (2.06)
152.4 168.2 168 190.5 160 160 170 180 180 170 180 190.5 200.2 216 235 180 190 200 210 210 216 235
J (6.00) (6.62) (6.61) (7.50) (6.30) (6.30) (6.69) (7.09) (7.09) (6.69) (7.09) (7.50) (7.88) (8.50) (9.25) (7.09) (7.48) (7.85) (8.24) (8.24) (8.50) (9.25)
4 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
N (0.16) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31)
19 22.4 22.4 25.4 18 18 22 26 26 22.4 25.4 19 22.4 25.4 31.8 18 22 26 30 30 25.4 31.8
G (0.75) (0.88) (0.88) (1.00) (0.71) (0.71) (0.86) (1.02) (1.02) (0.88) (1.00) (0.75) (0.88) (1.00) (1.25) (0.71) (0.87) (1.02) (1.18) (1.18) (1.00) (1.25)
WEIGHT kg 20.4 24.2 25.8 36.1 19.8 20.4 24.5 27.4 27.4 27.5 36.7 27.7 36.3 51.2 56.3 23.6 27.8 33.4 40.1 40.1 53.2 57.0
lb 44.98 53.36 56.89 79.60 43.66 44.98 54.02 40.41 40.41 60.64 80.92 61.30 80.04 112.90 124.14 52.04 61.30 73.64 88.4288.42 117.31 125.69

(Note 1) The flow direction is opposite (right to left when facing onto indicator) in case of code / CRC.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-26
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

High Process Temperature Version (/HT): DY150-/HT up to DY200-/HT


Flange type
Unit: mm
(approx. inch)

59(2.32) 59(2.32) ELECTRICAL


CONNECTION
4.5(0.18) 125(4.92)

103.5(4.07)
φ94(3.70)

EARTH

87.5(3.44)
TERMINAL

CLAMP
ONLY FOR KEMA
Explosion proof

T
N-φG H1
H

φD
φJ
φC

TYPE INTEGRAL/REMOTE
CODE DY150 (150mm,6in) / HT DY200 (200mm,8in) / HT
PROCESS BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5 BD1 BD3 BA1 BA2 BA4 BA5
CONNECTION BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 - BD2 - BD4 BD5 BD6 CA4 CA5 N/A BS1 BS2 BS4 BS5 BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 CA4 CA5 N/A N/A
270 310 336 270 325 340 310 370 386 310 375 390
L (10.63) (12.20) (13.23) (10.63) (12.80) (13.39) (12.20) (14.57) (15.20) (12.20) (14.77) (15.35)
C 138.8 (5.46) 185.6 (7.31)
279.4 317.5 356 381 285 300 345 355 356 381 342.9 381 419.1 469.9 340 340 360 375 419.1 469.9
D (11.00) (12.50) (14.02) (15.00) (11.22) (11.81) (13.37) (13.76) (14.02) (15.00) (13.50) (15.00) (16.50)) (18.50)) (13.39)) (13.39)) (14.17)) (14.76)) (16.50)) (18.50))
582 601 621 633 585 593 615 620 621 633 646 665 684 709 645 645 655 662 684 709
H (22.91) (23.66) (24.45) (24.92) (23.03) (23.35) (23.83) (24.02) (24.45) (24.92) (25.43) (26.18) (26.93) (27.91) (25.39) (25.39) (25.79) (26.06) (26.93) (27.91)
H1 339 (13.35) 371 (14.61)
25.4 36.6 54.4 62 22 28 36 44 55.7 63.6 28.4 41.1 62 69.9 24 24 30 34 63.6 71.4
T (1.00) (1.44) (2.14) (2.44) (0.87) (1.10) (1.39) (1.71) (2.19) (2.50) (1.12) (1.62) (2.44) (2.75) (0.95) (0.95) (1.18) (1.34) (2.50) (2.81)
241.3 269.7 292 317.5 240 250 280 290 292 317.5 298.5 330.2 349.3 393.7 295 295 310 320 349.3 393.7
J (9.50) (10.62) (11.50) (12.50) (9.45) (9.84) (10.85) (11.24) (11.50) (12.50) (11.75) (13.00) (13.75) (15.50) (11.61) (11.61) (12.20) (12.60) (13.75) (15.50)
8 12 12 12 8 8 8 12 12 12 8 12 12 12 8 12 12 12 12 12
N (0.31) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47) (0.31) (0.31) (0.31) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47) (0.31) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47) (0.31) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47) (0.47)
22.4 22.4 28.4 31.8 22 26 33 33 28.4 31.8 22.4 25.4 31.8 38.1 22 22 26 30 31.8 38.1
G (0.88) (0.88) (1.12) (1.25) (0.87) (1.02) (1.28) (1.28) (1.12) (1.25) (0.88) (1.00) (1.25) (1.50) (0.87) (0.87) (1.02) (1.18) (1.25) (1.50)
WEIGHT kg 36.4 54.4 84.4 106 33.4 42.9 58.1 76.4 90 107 55.4 80.4 136 182 46.3 46.3 53.6 55.9 139 183
lb 80.26 119.95 186.10 233.73 73.65 94.59 128.10 168.45 198.45 235.94 122.16 177.28 299.88 401.31 102.09 102.09 118.19 123.26 306.50 403.52

(Note 1) The flow direction is opposite (right to left when facing onto indicator) in case of code / CRC.

9-27 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Reduced Bore Type (/R1): DY025-/R1 up to DY150-/R1


Flange type

WITH INDICATOR

ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION

74
59 59
EARTH TERMINAL
4.5 125

103.5
φ94

87.5
CLAMP
T
H
H1
N- φG
φCS

φD
φC
φJ

Model Code DY025 /R1 Model Code DY040 /R1 Model Code DY050 /R1
BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2
Process Process Process
BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2
Connection Connection Connection
BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A
L 150 L 150 L 170
C 25.7 C 39.7 C 51.1
CS 14.6 CS 25.7 CS 39.7
D 108 124 D 127 155.4 D 152.4 165.1
H 284.5 292.5 H 296 310 H 315.5 322
H1 127 H1 129 H1 136
T 14.2 17.5 T 17.5 20.6 T 19.1 22.4
J 79.2 89 J 98.6 114.3 J 120.7 127
N 4 N 4 N 4 8
G 15.7 19 G 15.7 22.4 G 19 19
Weight kg 5.5 7.0 Weight kg 9.4 12.6 Weight kg 11.4 13.6

Model Code DY080 /R1 Model Code DY100 /R1 Model Code DY150 /R1
BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2
Process Process Process
BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2
Connection Connection Connection
BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A
L 200 L 220 L 270
C 71 C 93.8 C 138.8
CS 51.1 CS 71 CS 93.8
D 190.5 209.6 D 228.6 254 D 279.4 317.5
H 357 366.5 H 393 405.5 H 433 452
H1 158 H1 175 H1 190
T 23.9 28.4 T 23.9 31.8 T 25.4 36.6
J 152.4 168.2 J 190.5 200.2 J 241.3 269.7
N 4 8 N 8 N 8 12
G 19 22.4 G 19 22.4 G 22.4 22.4
Weight kg 21.9 26.9 Weight kg 30.6 41.0 Weight kg 49.4 71.7

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-28
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Reduced Bore Type (/R1): DY200-/R1


Flange type

WITH INDICATOR

ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION

74
59 59
EARTH TERMINAL
4.5 125
φ94

103.5

87.5
CLAMP T
N- φG

H1
H

φCS

φD
φC
φJ

Model Code DY200 /R1


BA1 BA2
Process BS1 BS2
Connection BP1 BP2 N/A N/A
L 310
C 185.6
CS 138.8
D 342.9 381
H 484 503
H1 209
T 28.4 41.1
J 298.5 330.2
N 8 12
G 22.4 25.4
Weight kg 70.7 102.9

9-29 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

High Process Temperature Version Reduced Bore Type (/R1/HT): DY040-/HT/R1 up to DY150-/R1/HT
Flange type

ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION

59 59
4.5 EARTH TERMINAL 125

103.5
φ94

87.5
CLAMP

H
H1

N- φG
φCS

φD
φC
φJ

Model Code DY040 /R1/HT Model Code DY050 /R1/HT Model Code DY080 /R1/HT
BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2
Process Process Process
BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2
Connection Connection Connection
BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A
L 150 L 170 L 200
C 39.7 C 51.1 C 71
CS 25.7 CS 39.7 CS 51.1
D 127 155.4 D 152.4 165.1 D 190.5 209.6
H 439 453 H 458.5 465 H 500 509.5
H1 272 H1 279 H1 301
T 17.5 20.6 T 19.1 22.4 T 23.9 28.4
J 98.6 114.3 J 120.7 127 J 152.4 168.2
N 4 N 4 8 N 4 8
G 15.7 22.4 G 19 19 G 19 22.4
Weight kg 9.8 13.0 Weight kg 11.8 14.0 Weight kg 22.3 27.3

Model Code DY100 /R1/HT Model Code DY150 /R1/HT


BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2
Process Process
BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2
Connection Connection
BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A
L 220 L 270
C 93.8 C 138.8
CS 71 CS 93.8
D 228.6 254 D 279.4 317.5
H 536 548.5 H 576 595.5
H1 318 H1 333
T 23.9 31.8 T 25.4 36.6
J 190.5 200.2 J 241.3 269.7
N 8 N 8 12
G 19 22.4 G 22.4 22.4
Weight kg 31.0 41.4 Weight kg 49.4 71.7

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-30
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

High Process Temperature Version Reduced Bore Type (/R1/HT): DY200-/R1/HT


Flange type

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
ANSI 1/2NPT Female
ISO M20 x 1.5 Female
59 59

4.5 EARTH TERMINAL


125

103.5
φ94

87.5
CLAMP
ONLY FOR
KEMA Explosionproof

T
N- φG
H

φCS

φD
φJ
φC

Model Code DY200 /R1/HT


BA1 BA2
Process
BS1 BS2
Connection
BP1 BP2 N/A N/A
L 310
C 185.6
CS 138.8
D 342.9 381
H 614 633
H1 339
T 28.4 41.1
J 298.5 330.2
N 8 12
G 22.4 25.4
Weight kg 70.7 102.9

9-31 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Reduced Bore Type (/R2): DY040-/R2 up to DY200-/R2


Flange type

WITH INDICATOR

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

74
59 59
EARTH TERMINAL
4.5 125

103.5
φ94

87.5
CLAMP T

N- φG
H1
H
φCS

φD
φC
φJ

Model Code DY040 /R2 Model Code DY050 /R2 Model Code DY080 /R2
BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2
Process Process Process
BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2
Connection Connection Connection
BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A
L 150 L 170 L 200
C 39.7 C 51.1 C 71
CS 14.6 CS 25.7 CS 39.7
D 127 155.4 D 152.4 165.1 D 190.5 209.6
H 294.0 308.2 H 308.7 315.1 H 334.8 344.3
H1 127 H1 129 H1 136
T 17.5 20.6 T 19.1 22.4 T 23.9 28.4
J 98.6 114.3 J 120.7 127 J 152.4 168.2
N 4 N 4 8 N 4 8
G 15.7 22.4 G 19 G 19 22.4
Weight kg 7.6 8.8 Weight kg 10.6 12.1 Weight kg 16.2 20

Model Code DY100 /R2 Model Code DY150 /R2 Model Code DY200 /R2
BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2
Process Process Process
BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2
Connection Connection Connection
BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A
L 220 L 270 L 310
C 93.8 C 138.8 C 185.6
CS 51.1 CS 71 CS 93.8
D 228.6 254 D 279.4 317.5 D 342.9 381
H 375.8 388.5 H 418.2 437.3 H 465.0 484
H1 158 H1 175 H1 190
T 23.9 31.8 T 25.4 36.6 T 28.4 41.1
J 190.5 200.2 J 241.3 269.7 J 298.5 330.2
N 8 N 8 12 N 8 12
G 19 22.4 G 22.4 22.4 G 22.4 25.4
Weight kg 25.5 34 Weight kg 43.3 61.3 Weight kg 71.9 96.9

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-32
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

High Process Temperature Version Reduced Bore Type (/R2/HT): DY050-/R2/HT up to DY200-/R2/HT

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

59 59
EARTH TERMINAL
4.5 125

103.5
φ94

87.5
CLAMP

H1
H
T

N- φG
φCS

φD
φC
φJ

Model Code DY050 /R2/HT Model Code DY080 /R2/HT Model Code DY100 /R2/HT
BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2
Process Process Process
BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2
Connection Connection Connection
BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A
L 170 L 200 L 220
C 51.1 C 71 C 93.8
CS 25.7 CS 39.7 CS 51.1
D 152.4 165.1 D 190.5 209.6 D 228.6 254
H 451.7 458.1 H 477.8 487.3 H 518.8 531.5
H1 272 H1 279 H1 301
T 19.1 22.4 T 23.9 28.4 T 23.9 31.8
J 120.7 127 J 152.4 168.2 J 190.5 200.2
N 4 8 N 4 8 N 8
G 19 G 19 22.4 G 19 22.4
Weight kg 11 12.5 Weight kg 16.6 20.4 Weight kg 25.9 34.4

Model Code DY150 /R2/HT Model Code DY200 /R2/HT


BA1 BA2 BA1 BA2
Process Process
BS1 BS2 BS1 BS2
Connection Connection
BP1 BP2 N/A N/A BP1 BP2 N/A N/A
L 270 L 310
C 138.8 C 185.6
CS 71 CS 93.8
D 279.4 317.5 D 342.9 381
H 561.2 580.3 H 608 627
H1 318 H1 333
T 25.4 36.6 T 28.4 41.1
J 241.3 269.7 J 298.5 330.2
N 8 12 N 8 12
G 22.4 22.4 G 22.4 25.4
Weight kg 43.3 61.3 Weight kg 71.9 96.9

9-33 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
9. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Remote Type Converter (DYA)


Unit: mm
(approx. inch)

74(2.91) WITH INDICATOR

59(2.32) 59(2.32) ELECTRICAL


CONNECTION
4.5(0.18) (both sides) 125(4.92)

103.5(4.07)
EARTH
φ94(3.70)

87.5(3.44)
TERMINAL

208.5(8.21)
CLAMP
ONLY FOR KEMA
Explosion
Proof

Weight: 1.9 kg (4.19 lb)


Note: For flowmeters with indicator, add 0.2 kg (0.44 lb)

Signal Cable for Remote Type (DYC)


Unit: mm
(approx. inch)

70 70
80 (2.76) (2.76) 80
(3.15) 60 60 (3.15)
50 (2.36) (2.36) 50
(Black) (White) (Red) (1.97) (1.97) (Red) (White) (Black)
(Yellow) (Yellow)
20 25
(0.79) (0.98) 95
(3.74) (Blue)

φ9.2
(0.36)
Cable Color and Terminal
Flowmeter

Converter

Specified Terminal
Length (L) Color
Flow meter Converter
30 m (max.)
Yellow(*1) T T
DYC Red A A
White B B
Black C
Blue
(*1) Only for /MV

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 9-34
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENTS

10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENT

In this section, further requirements and differences for Power Supply: 42Vdc max.
explosion proof type instrument are described except JIS Output Signal: Current Output; 4 to 20mAdc
Flame proof. For explosion proof type instrument, the Pulse output; On=2Vdc, 200mA
description in this chapter is prior to other description in this Off=42Vdc, 4mA
Instruction Manual. Maximum Working Pressure: 16MPa(DY015 to DY200)
5MPa(DY200 and DY300)
Coating of Enclosure: Epoxy resin coating or Polyurethane
WARNING resin coating
Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2 NPT female,
• Only trained persons use this instrument in ISO M20 X 1.5 female
industrial locations.
• Intrinsically Safe
Applicable Standard : EN50014: 1997, EN50020: 1994
EN60529: 1991
10.1 ATEX Certificate : KEMA 01ATEX1082X
Type of protection: EEx ia IIC T4…T1 (Integral Type
Flowmeter and Remote Type Flowmeter)
WARNING EEx d IIC T4 (Remote Type Converter)
Only trained persons use this instrument in Groups: Group II
industrial locations. Category: Category 1G
Maximum Working Pressure: 16MPa (DY015 to DY200)
5MPa (DY250 and DY300)
Tamb. (Integral Type Flowmeter): -29 to +60°C
10.1.1 Technical Data
Tamb. (Remote Type Flowmeter): -29 to +80°C
• Explosion proof Tamb. (Remote Type Converter): -40 to +60°C
Applicable Standard : EN50014: 1997, EN50018: 2000 Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100%RH (No condensation)
EN60529: 1991 (Integral Type Flowmeter)
Certificate : KEMA 01ATEX2072 Temperature Class Ambient Temperature Process Temperature
Type of protection: EEx d IIC T6…T1 (Integral Type
T4 60°C 135°C
Flowmeter and Remote Type Flowmeter)
T3 60°C 200°C
EEx d IIC T6 (Remote Type Converter)
Groups: Group II T2* 60°C 300°C
Category: Category 2G T1* 60°C 450°C
Temperature Code: (Integral Type Flowmeter and Remote T100101-2.eps
*: Use /HT version above 260°C
Type Flowmeter)
Temperature Class Ambient Temperature Process Temperature
(Remote Type Flowmeter)
T6 60°C 85°C Temperature Class Ambient Temperature Process Temperature
T5 60°C 100°C T4 80°C 135°C
T4 60°C 135°C T3 80°C 20°0C
T3 60°C 200°C T2* 80°C 300°C
T2 *1 60°C 300°C T1* 80°C 450°C
T1 *1 60°C 450°C T100101-3.eps
T100101-1.eps *: Use /HT version above 260°C
*1 Note: Use /HT version above 260°C
Temperature Class: T6 (Remote Type Converter) For connection to certified Intrinsically Safe circuit with
Degree of Protection of Enclosure: IP67 Signal/Supply and Pulse circuit of DY(/HT) and DYA :
Tamb: -29 to +60°C (Integral Type Flowmeter and Ui =30V dc, Ii=165mAdc, Pi= 0.9W, Ci= 6nF, Li= 0.15mH
Remote Type Flowmeter)
-30 to +60°C (Remote Type Converter) Connect sensor circuit of DYA to DY-N(/HT) :
-29 to +60°C (Integral Type Flowmeter with indicator) Maximum cable capacitance: 160nF
-30 to +60°C (Remote Type Converter with indicator) Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2 NPT female, ISO M20 X 1.5
Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100%RH female

10-1 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENTS

• Type of Protection “n” 10.1.2 Installation


Applicable Standard: EN60079-15: 2003
IEC60079-0: 1998
IEC60079-11: 1999 WARNING
Type of protection: EEx nL IIC T4…T1 (Integral Type
Flowmeter and Remote Type Flowmeter) • All wiring shall comply with local installation
EEx nL IIC T4 (Remote Type Converter) requirements and local electrical code.
Groups: Group II • Suitable heat-resisting cables shall be used for
Category: Category 3G the digitalYEWFLO Model DY Series Vortex
Maximum Working Pressure: 42MPa Flowmeter when the ambient temperature
Tamb. (Integral Type Flowmeter): -29 to +60°C exceeds +70°C and/or the process temperature
Tamb. (Remote Type Flowmeter): -29 to +80°C exceeds 135°C.
Tamb. (Remote Type Converter): -40 to +60°C • The cable entry devices shall be certified in
Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100%RH (No condensation)
type of protection flame proof enclosure “d” and
(Integral Type Flowmeter)
suitable for the conditions of use and correctly
Temperature Class Ambient Temperature Process Temperature installed.
T4 60°C 135°C • Unused apertures shall be closed with certified
T3 60°C 200°C blanking elements in type of protection flame
T2* 60°C 300°C proof enclose “d”.
T1* 60°C 45°0C
T100101-4.eps
*: Use /HT version above 260°C 10.1.3 Operation

(Remote Type Flowmeter)


Temperature Class Ambient Temperature Process Temperature WARNING
T4 80°C 135°C
• Wait 10 min. after power is turned off, before
T3 80°C 200°C
opening the covers.
T2* 80°C 300°C • Take care not to generate mechanical spark
T1* 80°C 450°C when access to the instrument and peripheral
*: Use /HT version above 260°C
T100101-5.eps
devices in hazardous locations.

Degree of protection of enclosure: IP67


Electrical data 10.1.4 Maintenance and Repair
Signal/Supply and Pulse circuit
Ui= 30Vdc, Ci= 6nF, Li= 0.15mH
Sensor circuit only for connection to DY-N(/HT) series WARNING
Maximum capacitance of cable: 160nF
Connect to DYA series only • The instrument modification or parts replace-
Electrical Connection: ANSI 1/2 NPT female, ISO M20 X 1.5 ment by other than authorized representative of
female Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited
and will void the certification.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 10-2
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENTS

10.1.5 Installation Diagram of Intrinsically 10.1.6 Installation Diagram of Type of


safe (and Note) Protection “n”

[Integral type] Non Hazardous [Integral type] Hazardous Non Hazardous


Hazardous Location Location Location
Safety barriers General Purpose
DY (Integral)    Equipment
DY (Flowmeter) ⫹ ⫹
SUPPLY Power Supply
SUPPLY ⫺
PULSE ⫺
   PULSE
⫹ ⫹
Reciever

[Remote type without built-in Temperature sensor]


Non Hazardous [Remote type]
Hazardous Location Hazardous Non Hazardous
Location Location
Safety barriers
DY-N (Remote) DYA (converter)  General Purpose
  Equipment
A A SUPPLY DYA (converter) ⫹
B B
DY-N (Flowmeter) ⫹
Power Supply
T T A A SUPPLY ⫺
PULSE ⫺
C    B B
T T(*1) PULSE
C ⫹ ⫹
DYC: Signal cable Reciever

DYC: Signal cable
[Remote type with built-in Temperature sensor]
Non Hazardous (*1): Wire for T termanal
Hazardous Location With temperature sensor type: Installed
Safety barriers Without temperature sensor type: Not Installed
DY-N (Remote) DYA (converter)   
A A SUPPLY Electric data:
B B
T T Maximum Input Voltage Ui: 30V
PULSE
C    Internal Capacitance Ci: 6nF
Internal Inductance Li: 0.15mH F100101-1.EPS
DYC: Signal cable

Note: In any safety barrier used output current must be limited


by a resistor ‘R’ such that Io=Uo/R

Electric data:
Supply and Output Circuit (SUPPLY  and , PULSE and )
Maximum Input Voltage Ui: 30V
Maximum Input Current Ii: 165mA
Maximum Input Power Pi: 0.9W
Internal Capacitance Ci: 6nF
Internal Inductance Li: 0.15mH
F100101.EPS

10-3 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENTS

10.1.7 Data Plate MODEL


SUFFIX
: Specified model code

STYLE : Specified style code.


MWP : Maximum working pressure of apparatus.
Explosion Proof K-FACTOR : Sensor constant number of apparatus.
Integral Type Flowmeter
RANGE : Meter range.
OUTPUT 4 to 20mA DC / PULSE TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOWMETER MWP MPa at 388C
No. : Serial number.
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR
*3) 2G
SUFFIX RANGE
KEMA No.:KEMA 01ATEX2072
EEx d IIC T6...T1 ENCLOSURE: IP67
TAG. No. : Tag number of apparatus.
Tamb.: -29 TO +608C
NO. *1) TEMP CLASS: T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
Made in *3)
*2)
PROCESS TEMP.: 85 100 135 200 300
NOTE: USE /HT VERSION ABOVE 8C 260
8C 450
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN
: Name and address of manufacturer.
SUPPLY 10.5 to 42V DC THE PROCESS TEMP.^ 2008C 3UE
Made in *4)
! WARNING
USE THE HEAT- RESISTING CABLES OF HIGHER8CTHAN 90
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN
AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 3 MINUETS BEFORE OPENING.
THE ENCLOSURE IS HOT AT HIGH PROCESS TEMP. N200 : CE-Marking.
Remote Type Flowmeter 2G : GroupII, Category 2 Gas atmosphere.
TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOWMETER MWP MPa at 388C KEMA No. : Certificate number.
*3) 2G
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR KEMA No .:KEMA 01A
EEx d IIC T6...T1
TEX2072
ENCLOSURE: IP67
KEMA 01ATEX2072 for EEx d
SUFFIX RANGE Tamb.: -29 TO +60
NO. *1) TEMP CLASS:
8C
T6 T5 T4 T3
PROCESS TEMP.: 85 100 135 200 300
T2 T1
8C 450
KEMA 01ATEX1082X for EEx ia
*2) NOTE: USE /HT VERSION ABOVE 8C 260

! WARNING
THE PROCESS TEMP.^ 2008C
USE THE HEAT- RESISTING CABLES OF HIGHER8CTHAN 90
3WE EEx d IIC T6...T1 : Type of protection and temperature class.
Made in *4) AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 3 MINUETS BEFORE OPENING.
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN THE ENCLOSURE IS HOT AT HIGH PROCESS TEMP. N200 Tamb : Ambient temperature.
PROCESS TEMP. : Process temperature.
Integral Type Converter
ENCLOSURE : Enclosure protection No.
OUTPUT 4 to 20mA DC / PULSE TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOW CONVERTER
*3) 2G NOTE : Note about model, suffix code "/HT"
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR
KEMA No.:KEMA 01ATEX2072
SUFFIX RANGE EEx d IIC T6...T1 ENCLOSURE: IP67
Tamb.: -40 TO +608C/ -30 TO 60
8C (WITH INDICATOR)
NO. *1)
*2)
*1) The third figure from the last shows the last one figure of the year product
ion.
SUPPLY 10.5 to 42V DC
! WARNING 3YE For example, the year of production of the product engraved as follow ear
is 2001.
y
Made in *4)
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN
AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 3 MINUETS BEFORE OPENING.
N200 No. 2 1 W C Z Z 0 5 2 1 2 0

Produced in 2001 or
Intrinsically safe *2) Year of production is indicated in clear text: “Produced 20 ”.
Integral Type Flowmeter *3) The identification number of the notified body. : 0344
OUTPUT 4 to 20mA DC / PULSE TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOWMETER MWP MPa at 388C *4) The product - producing country. F100102-2.EP
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR
*3) 1G
KEMA No.:KEMA 01ATEX1082 X
SUFFIX RANGE EEx ia IIC T4...T1 IP67 Tamb : -29 8C
to +60
*1) SEE CERTIFICATE FOR DATA
NO. NOTE:USE /HT VERSION ABOVE 8C260
*2)
SUPPLY 10.5 to 30V DC THE PROCESS TEMP.
^ 2008C 3UN
Made in *4)
! USE THE HEAT- RESISTING CABLES OF HIGHER8CTHAN 90
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN WARNING THE ENCLOSURE IS HOT AT HIGH PROCESS TEMP. N200

Remote Type Flowmeter IMPORTANT


TAG NO.

MODEL
SUFFIX
VORTEX FLOWMETER
STYLE
MWP
K-FACTOR
RANGE
MPa at 388C *3)
KEMA No.:KEMA 01ATEX1082 X
1G
EEx ia IIC T4...T1 IP67 Tamb : -29 8C
to +80
• In hazardous location, BT200 BRAIN Terminal
can not be connected to the digitalYEWFLO
*1) CONNECT TO DYA SERIES ONLY
NO. SEE CERTIFICATE FOR DATA
*2) NOTE:USE /HT VERSION ABOVE 8C260
3WN

which is approved by CENELEC (KEMA)


THE PROCESS TEMP.
^ 2008C
Made in *4)
! USE THE HEAT- RESISTING CABLES OF HIGHER8CTHAN 90
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN WARNING THE ENCLOSURE IS HOT AT HIGH PROCESS TEMP. N200

Remote Type Converter Intrinsically Safe. (See the IM 1C0A11-01E).


OUTPUT 4 to 20mA DC / PULSE TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOW CONVERTER
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR
*3) 1G
KEMA No.:KEMA 01ATEX1082 X
SUFFIX RANGE EEx ia IIC T4 IP67 Tamb : -40 8C
to +60
SEE CERTIFICATE FOR DATA
NO. *1)

SUPPLY 10.5 to 30V DC


*2)
3YN 10.1.8 Screw Marking
Made in *4)
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN N200
F100102.EPS
The type of electrical connection is stamped near the
electrical connection port according to the following codes.

Type of Protection“n”
SCREW SIZE MARKING
Integral Type Flowmeter
VORTEX FLOWMETER
OUTPUT
MWP
4 to 20mA DC / PULSE
MPa at 38
8C
TAG NO.

*3) 3G
M20 X 1.5 ! M
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR

A
EEx nL IIC T4...T1 ENCLOSURE: IP67
SUFFIX RANGE
NO. *1)
Tamb.: -29 To +80
TEMPCLASS:
8C
T4T3
PROCESS TEMP.: 135 200
T2 T1
300 4508C
1/2-14NPT !
Ui=30Vdc, Ci=6nF, Li=0.15mH
*2) NOTE: USE /HT VERSION ABOVE 2608C
SUPPLY 10.5 to 30V DC THE PROCESS TEMP.
^ 2008C UU
Made in *4)
! USE THE HEAT- RESISTING CABLES OF HIGHER
8CTHAN 90
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN WARNING THE ENCLOSURE IS HOT AT HIGH PROCESS TEMP. N200

Remote Type Flowmeter


TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOWMETER MWP MPa at 38
8C
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR
*3) 3G
EEx nL IIC T4...T1 ENCLOSURE: IP67
SUFFIX RANGE Tamb.: -29 To +80
8C
TEMPCLASS: T4T3 T2 T1
NO. *1) PROCESS TEMP.: 135 200 300 4508C
NOTE: USE /HT VERSION ABOVE
2608C
*2)
THE PROCESS TEMP.
^ 2008C WU
Made in *4)
! USE THE HEAT- RESISTING CABLES OF HIGHER
8CTHAN 90
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN WARNING THE ENCLOSURE IS HOT AT HIGH PROCESS TEMP. N200

Remote Type Converter


OUTPUT 4 to 20mA DC / PULSE TAG NO.
F100103.EPS
VORTEX FLOW CONVERTER
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR
*3) 3G
EEx nL IIC T4 ENCLOSURE: IP67
SUFFIX RANGE Tamb.: -40 To +60
8C
Ui=30Vdc, Ci=6nF, Li=0.15mH
NO. *1)
*2)
SUPPLY 10.5 to 30V DC YU
Made in *4)
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN N200
F100102-1.EPS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 10-4
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENTS

10.2 FM (Remote Type Converter)


Ambient Humidity: 0 to +100% RH (No condensation)
10.2.1 Technical Data Indoors and Outdoors: NEMA Type 4X
• Explosion Proof Electrical Parameters:Vmax=30Vdc, Imax=165mAdc,
Applicable Standard: FM3600, FM3611, FM3615, FM3810, Pi=0.9W, Ci=12nF, Li=0.15mH
Including Suppliment 1 Electrical connection : ANSI 1/2 NPT female
ANSI/NEMA 250
Type of Protection: Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, 10.2.2 Wiring
Groups A,B, C and D;
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, • Explosion proof
Division 1, Groups E, F,and G.
WARNING
"SEAL ALL CONDUITS 18 INCHES." " WHEN
INSTALLED IN DIV.2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED" • All wiring shall comply with National Electrical
Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and Local Electrical
Enclosure Rating: NEMA TYPE 4X Code.
Temperature Code: T6 • “SEAL ALL CONDUITS 18 INCHES” " WHEN
Ambient Temperature: -29 to 60°C (Integral Type Flowmeter INSTALLED DIV.2, SEALS NOT REQUIRED".
and Remote Type Flowmeter)
-40 to 60°C (Remote Type Converter)
• Intrinsically Safe
Ambient Humidity: 0 to 100%RH
Power Supply: 42Vdc max. (Integral Type Flowmeter and
Remote Type Converter)
WARNING
Output Signal (Integral Type Flowmeter): • The FM Approved Hand Held Communicator
Current Output; 4 to 20mAdc
may be connected at any point in the loop
Pulse Output; On=2Vdc, 200mA
between the digitalYEWFLO and the Control
Off=42Vdc, 4mA
Equipment.
Output Signal (Remote Type Flowmeter):
Output Signal to Converter; 30Vp-p, 100µAp-p
Input/Output Signal (Remote Type Converter):
10.2.3 Operation
Current Output; 4 to 20mAdc
Pulse Output; On=2Vdc, 200mA • Explosion proof
Off=42Vdc, 4mA
Input Signal from Flowmeter; 30Vp-p, 100µAp-p WARNING
Maximum Working Pressure: 15MPa (2160psi)
(DY015 to DY200) • Note a warning label worded as follows.
5MPa (720psi) Warning: OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOV-
(DY250 and DY300) ING COVER.
Coating of Enclosure: Epoxy resin coating or Polyurethane INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH
resin coating. THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL (IM)
IF6A1-01E.
• Intrinsically Safe • Take care not to generate mechanical spark
Applicable Standard: FM3600, FM3610, FM3611, FM3810, when access to the instrument and peripheral
Including Suppliment 1 devices in hazardous locations.
ANSI/NEMA 250
Type of Protection: Intrinsically safe for Class I, II, III,
Div.1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G,T4 10.2.4 Maintenance and Repair
and Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T4
Nonincendive for Class I, II, Div. 2,
Groups A, B, C, D, F and G, Class III, WARNING
Div.1, T4, and Class I, Zone 2, Group
• The instrument modification or part replace-
IIC, T4
Ambient Temperature: –29 to +60°C
ments by other than authorized representative
(Integral Type Flowmeter) of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited
–29 to +80°C and will void the approval of FM Approvals.
(Remote Type Flowmeter)
–40 to +80°C
10-5 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENTS

10.2.5 Installation Diagram Nonincendive (and WARNING)

Intrinsically Safe (and WARNING) Hazardous Location Non Hazardous


Location
Hazardous Location Non Hazardous Class I, II, Division 2,
Location Groups A, B, C, D, F and G,
Class I, II, III, Division 1, Class III, Division 1, and
Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G, Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC
and Class I, Zone 0, Group IIC [Integral type]
[Integral type] DY (flowmeter) + + Power +
Safety barriers – Supply –
SUPPLY
DY (flowmeter)1 1 1 –
SUPPLY 2 2 PULSE
+ + +
2 –Reciever–
PULSE
1 1 1
2 2 [Remote type]
[Remote type] DY-N (flowmeter) DY (converter) + + Power +
Safety barriers A A SUPPLY
– Supply –
DY-N (flowmeter) DYA (converter) 1 1 1 B B –
T T (*1) PULSE
A A SUPPLY 2 2 C + + +
B B 2 –Reciever–
T T (*1) PULSE
C 1 1 1 DYC: Signal cable
2 2
(*1) Wire for T terminal
DYC: Signal cable
With temperature sensor type : installed
(*1) Wire for T terminal Without temperature sensor type: not installed
With temperature sensor type : installed
Without temperature sensor type: not installed Non-incendive field wire parameters of vortex flowmeter (DY)
and vortex flow converter (DYA).
Electrical parameters of vortex flowmeter (DY) and vortex flow Vmax=30V Imax=165mA Pi=0.9W
converter (DYA). Ci=12nF Li=0.15mH
Vmax=30V Imax=165mA Pi=0.9W
Ci=12nF Li=0.15mH Installation requirement between flowmeter, converter and
general purpose equirement.
nstallation requirement between flowmeter, converter and Vt or Voc Vmax It or Isc Imax Po Pi
Safety Barrier Ca Ci+Ccable La Li+Lcable
Vt or Voc % Vmax It or Isc % Imax Po% Pi Vt, Voc, It, Isc, Po, Ca and La are nonincendive field
Ca ^ Ci+Ccable wire parameters of general purpose equipment.
La ^ Li+Lcable F100201_2.EPS
Vt, Voc, It, Isc, Voc, Ca and La are parameters of barrier.
F100201_1.EPS

WARNING
WARNING
1. The general purpose equipment must be FM
1. In any safety barrier used output current must
approved with Nonincendive field wiring
be limited by a resistor ‘R’ such that Isc=Voc/R.
parameter which meet the above installation
2. Any Single FM Approved Barrier of multiple
requirements.
barriers FM Approved for this configuration
2. Installation should be in accordance with
who’s parameters meet the above installation
National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA70.
requirements.
3. Dust-tight conduit seal must be used when
3. Input voltage of the safety barrier must be less
installed in class II and III environments.
than 250Vrms/Vdc.
4. Do not alter drawing without authorization
4. Installation should be in accordance with
from FM.
National Electrical Code, ANSI /NFPA70.
5. Dust-tight conduit seal must be used when
installed in class II and III environments.
6. Do not alter drawing without authorization
from FM.

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 10-6
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENTS

10.2.6 Data Plate

Explosion Proof
Integral Type Flowmeter
OUTPUT 4 to 20mA DC / PULSE TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOWMETER MWP MPa at 38 C EXPLOSIONPROOF
FM CLI,DIV1,GPS A,B,C&D;
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR DUST-IGNITIONPROOF
APPROVED CLII/III,GPS E, F&G
SUFFIX RANGE TEMP.CODE:T6, NEMA 4X
NO. AMB.TEMP.: -29 to 60 C
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV.2 ,SEALS NOT REQUIRED.

SUPPLY 10.5 to 42V DC OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING COVER. 3UC


! INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH
*1) WARNING THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL IM 1F6A0-01E N200

Remote Type Flowmeter


TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOWMETER MWP MPa at 38 C EXPLOSIONPROOF
FM CLI,DIV1,GPS A,B,C&D;
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR DUST-IGNITIONPROOF
SUFFIX RANGE APPROVED CLII/III,GPS E, F&G
TEMP.CODE:T6, NEMA 4X
NO. AMB.TEMP.: -29 to 60 C
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV.2 ,SEALS NOT REQUIRED.

OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING COVER. 3WC


! INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH
*1) WARNING THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL IM 1F6A0-01E N200

Remote Type Converter


OUTPUT 4 to 20mA DC / PULSE TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOW CONVERTER EXPLOSIONPROOF
FM CLI,DIV1,GPS A,B,C&D;
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR DUST-IGNITIONPROOF
APPROVED CLII/III,GPS E, F&G
SUFFIX RANGE TEMP.CODE:T6 NEMA 4X
NO. AMB.TEMP.: -40 to 60 C
SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN 18 INCHES
WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV.2 ,SEALS NOT REQUIRED.

SUPPLY 10.5 to 42V DC OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING COVER. 3YC


! INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH
*1) WARNING THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL IM 1F6A0-01E N200

Intrinsically safe
Integral Type Flowmeter
OUTPUT 4 to 20mA DC / PULSE TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOWMETER MWP MPa at 38 C INTRINSICALLY SAFE FOR CL1,2,3,
FM DIV 1, GPS A,B,C,D,E,F&G, T4
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR AND CL1, ZONE 0. AEx ia 2C T4
APPROVED NONINCENDIVE FOR CL 1, 2, DIv 2,
SUFFIX RANGE GAS A,B,C,D,F&G, CL 3, DIV 1, T4,
AND CL1, ZONE 2 GP 2C, T4
NO.
AMB. TEMP. : -29 to 60 C NEMA 4X
Vmax = 30V, Imax = 165mA, Pi = 0.9W, Ci = 12nF, Li = 0.15mH

SUPPLY 10.5 to 42V DC SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR 3UE


! INTRINSIC SAFETY. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE
*1) WARNING WITH DOC. NO. IFM019-A12 P1 & 2. N200

Remote Type Flowmeter


TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOWMETER MWP MPa at 38 C INTRINSICALLY SAFE FOR CL1,2,3,
FM DIV 1, GPS A,B,C,D,E,F&G, T4
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR AND CL1, ZONE 0. AEx ia 2C T4
APPROVED NONINCENDIVE FOR CL 1, 2, DIV 2,
SUFFIX RANGE GAS A,B,C,D,F&G, CL 3, DIV 1, T4,
AND CL1, ZONE 2 GP 2C, T4
NO.
AMB. TEMP. : -29 to 80 C NEMA 4X

SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR 3UE


! INTRINSIC SAFETY. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE
*1) WARNING WITH DOC. NO. IFM019-A12 P1 & 2. N200

Integral Type Converter


OUTPUT 4 to 20mA DC / PULSE TAG NO.
VORTEX FLOW CONVERTER INTRINSICALLY SAFE FOR CL1,2,3,
FM DIV 1, GPS A,B,C,D,E,F&G, T4
MODEL STYLE K-FACTOR AND CL1, ZONE 0. AEx ia 2C T4
APPROVED NONINCENDIVE FOR CL 1, 2, DIV 2,
SUFFIX RANGE GAS A,B,C,D,F&G, CL 3, DIV 1, T4,
AND CL1, ZONE 2 GP 2C, T4
NO. AMB. TEMP. : -40 to 60 C NEMA 4X
Vmax = 30V, Imax = 165mA, Pi = 0.9W, Ci = 12nF, Li = 0.15mH

SUPPLY 10.5 to 42V DC SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR 3UE


! INTRINSIC SAFETY. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE
*1) WARNING WITH DOC. NO. IFM019-A12 P1 & 2. N200
F100202.EPS
Made in *1)
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN : Name and address of manufacturer.
*1) The product - producing country.

10-7 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
10. EXPLOSION PROTECTED TYPE INSTRUMENTS

IM 01R06A00-01E-E 10-8
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
11. PRESSURE EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE

11. PRESSURE EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE

This chapter is described further requirements and notices • Please pay attention to prevent the excessive
concerning the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive). The pressure like water hammer, etc. When
description in this chapter is prior to other description in this water hammer is to be occurred, please take
User’s Manual. measures to prevent the pressure from
exceeding PS(maximum allowable pressure)
(1) Technical Data
by setting the safety valve, etc. at the system
Type of Equipment: Piping and the like.
Type of Fluid: Liquid and Gas
Group of Fluid: 1 and 2 • When external fire is to be occurred, please
Model DN(mm)* PS(MPa)* PS-DN(MPa-mm) CATEGORY** take safety measures at the device or system
Article 3,***
not to influence the flowmeters.
DY015 15 42 630
Paragraph 3
• Please pay attention not to be abrade the
DY025 25 42 1050
Article 3,*** metal pipe, when the fluid to abrade the lining
Paragraph 3
such as slurry and sand are contained.
DY040 40 42 1680 II
DY050 50 42 2100 II
DY080 80 42 3360 II
DY100 100 42 4200 II WARNING
DY150 150 42 6300 II
The operator is responsible that no corrosion and/
DY200 200 42 8400 III
or erosion is caused by the medium, which
DY250 250 42 10500 III reduces the safety of the unit as pressure vessel.
DY300 300 42 12600 III Corrosion and erosion can make the unit fail and
DY400 400**** 25 10000 III can lead to the endangering of persons and
T110001.EPS
facilities. If corrosion and erosion are possible, the
* PS: Maximum allowable pressure for Flow Tube
integrity of the tubes has to be checked
DN: Nominal size
periodically.
** Referred to Table 6 covered by ANNEX II of EC
Directive on Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC
*** DY015 and DY025 are not regulated by PED.
**** Special-order product
(2) Installation

WARNING

• Please tighten the bolts for piping-joint


according to the prescribed torque values.
• Please take measure to protect the flowmeters
from forces caused by vibration through piping.

(3) Operation

WARNING

• The temperature and pressure of fluid should be


applied under the normal operating condition.
• The ambient temperature should be applied
under the normal operating condition.

11-1 IM 01R06A00-01E-E
3rd edition, Jan. 2007
IM 01R06A00-01E-E 3rd edition is based on IM 1F6A0-01E up to 10th edition.

Manufactured by: or Produced by :


Yokogawa Electric Corporation RotaYokogawa
2-9-32 Nakacho Rheinstr. 8
Musashino-Shi; Tokio 180 D-79664 Wehr
Japan Germany

IM 01R06A00-01E-H
3rd edition, Jan. 2007

Subject to change without notice. Copyright ©